
WS o *• *• 


/ 1 



> „ * 't, \\ 


* & ^ 

* <£ r\^> o M O *^ 1 . 

brfc ^0 0 ° ® * O 


^ " 1 * * f 0 

’ * C> *9 * * 

* <A * - *> 

x 'S' b ° 

• o 

* V > - 




^ d» ** 
" -#•„<» « 

°, v 1 • 

• ^ Vr V * 

* *y V 




* A 

* A,- ' 9 jj, » 

*> ^ '••••* A V-— S 



O ^ s * A 





•** A 


° ^5 c u> 

*£. + %vVl\\NNN> * \ v vw //M/yi . 

<£. ^ r O * ^ct4r a *C 0 

.v ,-v <„ -> V N .<••. ■>* ..-], 

■< . v *®V. •?- ^ ,>%sV<. ^ ,** .' 

o vP rS 






\P s 


1 „* V ' ; V ° 



A ^ - 

* ^ • 

« -CL V r i> 

A 0 < 2 - O’ <b "o , h * v, 

,(T © ° " ° ♦ ^o A V . v . . 'b A 

X ,<t - ,v -£^>- ’V * « ^ 

<■* °n \^“V „0 •%. *>\JS§S‘.* <,K /-* ‘.X 

0 \* °* *•■’* f° V *o.«’ ^ 

v •'-■•' A*) > 

W^M . 

0> -^c. ° 

* V V 


o - 
o * 

V ,''°. "* 0 . 

■ ^ ^ /j 

♦ ,J 5> 

* &■ 

°** 4 A° ^T'.'i* A 

,0 «°* a - o A % 

0 * O 





/ *> 


♦ t . av 1 ^ <* a 

° ^r, <A * ^ 

o vJ* /- ^ . 

vP S ° 

2 


o \ 




° & * 
\ f V 

'• * v *v ' 

* V <f> 





* 4 '" Vr % % 

• • V ^ / 

Vj w • A <£* 

° ^ f 

*'o^ ' 


♦ 0 -r " 4 o 

b &- •* ° ■o- v 

0 <£• * -a.' 

<J> * ® « 0 9 V 

VVV'* > ' N 

/^flpv. 4> 


• .* V- V 

♦ v v* 


0 


*b V 


b & » 0 ^ °** 

k 0 & * * -tt.^ 

<9- * o » o $ 

*!^1% ^ ‘ N 

* 




♦ r\ -^u * 

* rs ' <£* •* -- a 

• - l) Vrx * ^ ~ o 

A v V. 0 M V 

J)’ .•V', \> 

* •***: \/ 

- v> ^ 

* 4 e * + 

-'. *** A° . 

r o v * 


0*0 



* # *» 


* , *1 



4 O 

® 4? ^ 

rt f <*> *•■•• jf % • 

jF *liL> > V % >*••' ^ A 

• <p n <4 
t ^ v 1 


A/ v-* * 



* * 

” v*V 


% ^ 

.c**' .o 



a^. 







EDWARD STRATEMEYER'S BOOKS 


©la (Stag Series 

Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA. UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES. 

A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA. THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE. 
FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS. UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON. 


Stratemeger Popular Series 

Ten Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00. 


THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE. 
REUBEN STONE'S DISCOVERY. 

TRUE TO HIMSELF. 

RICHARD DARE'S VENTURE. 

OLIVER BR'GHT’S SEARCH. 


TO ALASKA FOR GOLD. 

THE YOUNG AUCTIONEER. 

BOUND TO BE AN ELECTRICIAN. 
SHORTHAND TOM, THE REPORTER 
FIGHTING FOR HIS OWN. 


Soltucrs of jFortune Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

ON TO PEKIN. AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR. 

UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG. UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN. 

American Bogs’ Biographical Scries 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY. 

AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT. 


Colonial Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST. AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL 

MARCHING ON NIAGARA. ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC. 

THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS. 

Pan^mertcan Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

LOST ON THE ORINOCO. YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS. 

THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS. YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON. 

JDafre Porter Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL. 


TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN. Price % 1.25. 
BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON. Price % 1.25. 
JOE, THE SURVEYOR. Price $1.00. 

LARRY, THE WANDERER. Price $1.00. 


































* 

















Despite the peril of the situation Admiral Togo stood on 
the bridge. — Page 270. 




Solblers of jpoctuite Series 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

OR 

THREE YOUNG AMERICANS ON LAND 
AND SEA 


BY 

EDWARD STRATEMEYER 

\\ 

Author of “ Under the Mikado’s Flag,” “ At the Fall of Port 
Arthur,” “ Old Glory Series,” “ Pan-American Series,” 
“Colonial Series,” “American Boys’ Life of 
Theodore Roosevelt,” etc. 


ILLUSTRATED BY A. B. SHUTE 



• > \ 

> « 

> > ) 

L" 

BOSTON 

LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. 



Published, March, 1906 


rz. 





LIBRARY of CONGRESS 
Two Copies Received 

tfAR 9 1906 



Copyright, 1906, by Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Company 


All rights reserved 


Under Togo for Japan 


Ube IttorvjeoV ipress 

Berwick and Smith Co. 
Norwood, Mass. 

U. S. A. 


PREFACE 

“ Under Togo for Japan ” is a complete tale in 
itself, but forms the fourth volume in a line pub- 
lished under the general title of “ Soldiers of For- 
tune Series.” 

The principal characters of these stories are the 
Russell brothers, Ben and Larry, and their steadfast 
friends, Gilbert Pennington and Luke Striker, all 
well known to the readers of my “ Old Glory 
Series,” issued several years ago. Ben and Gil- 
bert are in the Mikado’s army, while Larry and 
Luke are in the Japanese navy; and all do their 
utmost to bring the enemy to terms and establish 
that peace which has but recently been assured. 

The war between Russia and Japan has been 
fruitful of some tremendous conflicts, and the 
world has scarcely witnessed anything that will 
parallel the two struggles which are related in de- 
tail in this volume. On land the Battle of Muk- 
den, lasting from February 23 to March 10, 1905, 
was probably the greatest in history, the Russians 
iii 


iv 


PREFACE 


having an army of 360,000 men against a Japanese 
force of 410,000 men. Thousands upon thousands 
of lives were lost, and the Mikado’s troops took 
whole regiments of the Czar’s followers as pris- 
oners. The entire front of the Russian defense 
was broken — a front which extended more than a 
hundred miles across Manchuria — and only a 
hasty retreat saved the Czar’s army from complete 
annihilation. 

On the ocean, the Battle of the Sea of Japan, 
which took place May 27 to 30, 1905, must be 
reckoned, in some respects, a greater victory for 
Admiral Togo than was Nelson’s victory at Traf- 
algar, Dewey’s at Manila, or Sampson and 
Schley’s at Santiago. In this great running fight 
the Japanese, then considered the seventh strongest 
naval power in the world, wiped out the very 
flower of the Russian navy, looked upon as the 
third strongest naval power of our globe! It was 
a fierce onslaught throughout, full of deeds which 
were heroic in the extreme, and Japan proved be- 
yond all doubt that henceforth she must be con- 
sidered almost as strong as any of the nations of 
the Old World. 

Peace is now assured by the treaty of Ports- 
mouth and let us trust that it will be long-lasting. 
War at its best is a horrible thing, and International 


PREFACE 


V 


Arbitration cannot too quickly take the place of all 
contests upon the battlefield. 

Once again I thank my readers for the interest 
they have shown in my books, and I trust the 
present volume will entertain and instruct them. 

Edward Stratemeyer. 

New Year's Day , 1906. 















































































































































CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 


I. 

A Strange Disappearance 


. i 

II. 

Affairs in Port Arthur 


. 9 

III. 

Walking into a Trap 


. 18 

IV. 

An Unsatisfactory Interview 


27 

V. 

The Old Powder House , 


• 37 

VI. 

Aboard the Warship 


• 47 

VII. 

A Personal Encounter 


. 56 

VIII. 

Something of a Naval Battle 


. 66 

IX. 

The Wrecking of the Warship 


• 75 

X. 

Ben and Gilbert on the March 


. 85 

XI. 

A Clew and a Plan 


• 95 

XII. 

The Abandoned Mine 


. 104 

XIII. 

A Fight in the Hills 


. 114 

XIV. 

With the Army Once More 


. 124 

XV. 

The Battle of Mukden Begins 


. 134 

XVI. 

More about the Great Battle 


. 144 

XVII. 

Surrounded by the Enemy 


• 154 

XVIII. 

Odd News from an Old Acquaintance . 

. 163 

XIX. 

An Important Capture 


. 173 

XX. 

Carried off by the Enemy 


. 183 

XXI. 

Larry and His Trials 

' 

. 193 

XXII. 

A New Appointment 


. 202 

XXIII. 

The Water-logged Chinese Junk 


. 212 

XXIV. 

Larry and the Bear 


. 222 


vii 


CONTENTS 


viii 


CHAPTER 



page 

XXV. 

Admiral Togo and His Flagship 


. 232 

XXVI. 

Larry before the Admiral . 


. 240 

XXVII. 

The Battle of the Sea of Japan 


. 249 

XXVIII. 

Admiral Togo’s Great Victory . 


. 259 

XXIX. 

On the Hospital Ship . 


. 268 

XXX. 

The Enemy Makes an Offer 


. 277 

XXXI. 

A Daring Dash for Liberty 


. 286 

XXXII. 

The Rescue — Conclusion 


. 296 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Despite the peril of the situation Admiral Togo stood 
On the bridge (page 271) Frontispiece 

PAGE 

Larry caught the iron bar and twisted it from the 
man’s grasp 19 

They stared in horror at the slow match 41 

The searchlight of the wrecked vessel was turned 


upon them 79 

The Japanese cavalry dashed up on a mad gallop . . 157 

He brought the club around with all the strength he 
could muster 225 

For the first time in his life he entered the cabin of 
the Mikasa 244 

“ Luke, are you hurt ? ” he gasped 261 


I 


/ 








UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

CHAPTER I 

A STRANGE DISAPPEARANCE 

“ Well, this is certainly strange news, Gilbert.” 

“Another Japanese victory, Ben?” And Gil- 
bert Pennington, a young American in the service 
of the Mikado, smiled broadly. “ Nothing strange 
about that. We’ve been defeating the Russians 
right along.” 

“ I’m not talking about a victory, or a defeat 
either, Gilbert. I’m talking about the disappear- 
ance of a gentleman both of us know well.” 

“ Who has disappeared ? ” 

“ Mr. Chase.” 

“ What, Mr. Nathan Chase, of the Anglo- 
Chinese Trading Company?” 

“ The same.” 

“ Who told you this ? ” And now Gilbert Pen- 
nington became all attention, for Nathan Chase 
had proved his friend on more than one occasion. 


2 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ His daughter Grace told me. You see I called 
there this morning — just to pay my respects ” — 
Ben Russell blushed a little. “ Thought I had best 
let her know that we were going to leave Port 
Arthur in the near future — that we were wanted 
at the front. She was all upset. Her father had 
left the house night before last, saying he would 
be back by ten o’clock, and that’s the last she has 
seen or heard of him.” 

“ More trouble, as sure as guns,” came from a 
third person seated in the room, which had a 
month before been a barracks for Russian soldiers. 
“ Ten to one this is some more of the Russians’ 
work.” 

“ Oh, you mustn’t lay everything to the Rus- 
sians, Larry,” said Ben Russell. “ It may turn out 
all right. But it’s queer, to say the least.” 

“Did Grace Chase give you any particulars?” 
asked Gilbert. 

“She says her father started to visit the Japanese 
commander at one of the upper forts — wanted to 
find out where certain supplies were to be shipped. 
But the commander at the fort never saw Mr. 
Chase.” 

“ Then he must have been attacked on the way,” 
said Larry Russell. “ You can think as you please, 
but you know as well as I do that Port Arthur is 


A STRANGE DISAPPEARANCE 3 

still full of sneaking Russians and thieving China- 
men, who would do anything to get hold of a dol- 
lar, and many of them know that Mr. Chase is 
rich and apt to carry considerable money and 
jewelry on his person. Those chaps would do 
anything on a dark night, if they thought they 
could escape detection.” 

“ Miss Chase didn’t say that her father might 
have gone somewhere else?” asked Gilbert. 

“ No, he didn’t say a word, and you don’t sup- 
pose he’d go off anyway for several days and leave 
her all alone in that house, with matters as un- 
settled as they are in this city.” 

“ Is she alone, Ben ? I didn’t know that.” 

“ As good as alone. She has one old woman 
working for her — a half-deaf creature. This dis- 
appearance of her father has nearly driven her 
crazy. She hasn’t another relative within five 
thousand miles, and she doesn’t know where to 
turn or what to do. The office of the Trading 
Company is shut up, and the Russian clerks have 
all packed their grips and got out.” 

“ Is there anything wrong down at the office ? ” 

“ She doesn’t know. She is so worked up and 
nervous she doesn’t dare to go down there to find 
out.” 

“ Humph ! ” Gilbert Pennington mused for a 


4 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


moment. “ Then the best thing we can do is to 
visit the office and take a look around. Has she 
the keys ? ” 

“ Yes. I thought of asking for them, but then 
I came to the conclusion that you had better do it, 
Gilbert — you know more about the trading busi- 
ness than I do, having been in it so long yourself.” 

“ Then let us go at once — we have still three 
hours off-time. Larry, will you go along?” 

“ To be sure!” cried the youth addressed. “I 
don’t know much about Mr. Chase, but when a 
young lady’s in distress ” 

“ It’s a Jack-tar who is willing to go to the 
rescue every time,” finished Gilbert, with a smile. 

“ It’s Ben who will do the hero act,” said Larry, 
with a broad grin. “ Ever since Miss Chase gave 
him shelter when he got away from that Russian 
prison, he’s been spouting about how nice ” 

“ Come now, Larry ! ” expostulated his big 
brother. “ This is no joking matter. If Mr. 
Chase is in trouble ” 

“ We’ll all do our best to get him out of it,” 
interrupted the young sailor. “ Come on. The 
quicker we get at this mystery the better.” And 
he stalked out of the barracks, followed by the 
others. “ Phew ! but it’s cold ! ” he added, when 
he was in the street. 


A STRANGE DISAPPEARANCE 5 

“ Fast walking will help to keep us warm/’ an- 
swered Gilbert, and he set the pace, down the main 
thoroughfare of Port Arthur, and around a corner, 
leading to a side street whereon was located the 
private residence of Nathan Chase, the merchant 
who had so mysteriously disappeared. 

To those who have read the previous volumes of 
this “ Soldiers of Fortune Series ” and also the 
“ Old Glory Series,” Gilbert Pennington and the 
Russell brothers will need no special introduction. 
Gilbert was a young Southerner who, during our 
war with Spain, served both in Cuba and in the 
Philippines, fighting many battles side by side with 
Ben Russell, his chum through thick and thin. 

From the island of Luzon Gilbert was sent to 
China, to participate in the quelling of the Boxer 
Uprising, as related in the first volume of this 
series, called “ On to Pekin.” As a lieutenant of 
the regulars the young man did his duty fully and 
was discharged from the United States Army with 
honor. 

Gilbert was a heavy stockholder in a concern 
known as the Richmond Importing Company, and 
after laying down his sword he went to Port 
Arthur, in Manchuria, and opened an office for 
that concern. But the breaking out of the war 
between Russia and Japan made business bad, 


6 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


and he was suspected of being a spy and had to 
run away to escape being thrown into a Russian 
dungeon. This so embittered him that he joined 
the Japanese army, to fight several battles, as told 
in “ Under the Mikado’s Flag.” 

While Gilbert was having his troubles in Port 
Arthur, Ben and Larry Russell were on their way 
to Nagasaki in an old trading vessel, the Columbia , 
which had been Larry’s home on the ocean for 
several trips. When Ben and Gilbert met, the 
chum spirit was so strong in each that Ben also 
joined the Japanese army. Later on, Larry joined 
the Japanese navy, and what all three did on land 
and sea has been related in full in “At the Fall of 
Port Arthur.” The city held out long and stub- 
bornly, but at last General Stoessel was forced to 
capitulate, and the Japanese took possession of the 
forts and all the public buildings. This was at a 
time when Ben was locked up in a Russian prison, 
but he was quickly released, much to the satisfac- 
tion of Gilbert and also of Larry, who chanced to 
be ashore at the time. 

Gilbert and Ben were attached to a special Japanese 
command, under a Major Okopa, who could speak 
good English. Previous to the last grand assault 
on Port Arthur the command had done good work 
at the great battle of Liao Yang, helping to drive 


A STRANGE DISAPPEARANCE 


7 


the Russian forces in upper Manchuria northward 
in the direction of Mukden. The soldiers were 
now resting on the outskirts of Port Arthur, and 
although both of the chums held commissions as 
captains they had for the time being but little to 
do. Now, however, word had come that in a few 
days the command must move northward once 
more, and there was every prospect of fierce fight- 
ing ahead. 

Since joining the Japanese navy Larry had be- 
come attached to the Shohirika, a big warship 
which had participated in more than one encounter 
with the Russian fleet. With the young sailor was 
his old-time Yankee friend, Luke Striker, who had 
served with him while under Dewey at Manila. 
The Shohirika was now undergoing some slight 
repairs at Port Arthur, and Larry was fortunate 
enough to get a leave of absence so that he might 
be with his brother and Gilbert for the time being. 

All three of the young Americans knew Mr. 
Nathan Chase and his daughter Grace fairly well. 
During Gilbert’s first visit to Port Arthur Mr. 
Chase had given him many business hints of value 
and Grace had invited him to take tea at the well- 
furnished home. Then, when the war was on, 
Grace had given Ben the shelter already mentioned 
— he having first saved her from the hands of a 


8 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


brutal Cossack who wished to rob her. After the 
fall of the city it had been Nathan Chase who had 
helped them again in a business way and it was 
Grace who came forward to ask about their 
wounds, and though their sufferings were, for- 
tunately, small, the young lady did all she could to 
make them comfortable. 

“ You have all fought bravely,” she said. “ And, 
being an American too, I am proud of you.” 

“ Well, we did what we could,” had been Gil- 
bert’s answer. “ But we didn’t do it all, not by a 
good deal. You just ought to see the Japs fight! 
Why, they are regular tigers on the battlefield.” 

“ And on the deck of a ship, too,” had come 
from Larry. “ Every man on a warship is will- 
ing to face death any time.” 

“ Nevertheless, as Grace says, you have done 
well,” Nathan Chase had added. “ And as long 
as you are in Port Arthur you must come here 
whenever you can, and make yourselves at home.” 


CHAPTER II 


AFFAIRS IN PORT ARTHUR 

Although Port Arthur had capitulated several 
weeks before and was now in the hands of the 
Japanese, matters were still much unsettled in that 
city. The Russian citizens, and especially the mer- 
chants, hardly knew what to do, and the Chinese 
and other foreigners were in a like predicament. 
Every point was under military guard, and it was 
only because Gilbert and Ben wore the uniforms of 
army captains that they were allowed to pass un- 
molested, taking Larry with them. 

On every side were the grim evidences of the 
terrible bombardment which had during December, 
1904, made the city an Inferno on earth. Many 
buildings were in ruins, the very pavements of the 
streets were ripped up, and here and there were the 
ruins of buildings which the flames had devoured. 
Many stores that had escaped injury were closed 
and boarded up, and whole blocks of residences were 
tenantless or else occupied by a thieving element 
that had no right to be in them. The shipping had 


9 


10 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


been completely destroyed, and the loose ice floating 
in the harbor bumped mercilessly against the sides 
of the sunken Russian warships which had fought 
their last fights. In the streets and byways the 
snow lay to the depth of several inches, and a keen 
wind made journeying from one point to another 
anything but a comfort. 

“ It will take years to straighten out affairs here,” 
remarked Ben, as he looked at the wreckage of 
several handsome stone buildings. “Just see how 
the shell fire worked havoc here ! ” 

“ Some of the Russians who were here will never 
come back,” answered Gilbert. “ They must have 
lost next to everything.” 

“ Fortunes of war,” was Larry’s comment. 
“ I’m glad I wasn’t here during the last days of the 
bombardment.” 

Presently the three young Americans came in 
sight of Nathan Chase’s residence. It was set in 
the center of a small garden. In front was a broad 
piazza, one corner of which had been torn away by 
a shell. Near the gate to the garden lay a small 
tree, also cut down by a shell which had torn a hole 
in the ground several feet in diameter. 

The three had scarcely reached the piazza when 
the front door was opened and Grace Chase ap- 
peared. She was about Larry’s age, tall and slen- 


AFFAIRS IN PORT ARTHUR 


II 


der, with soft brown eyes and curly brown hair. 
Her face, usually attractive, was now white and 
careworn. 

“ You have news ? ” she asked quickly, gazing 
from one to another. 

“ No, Miss Chase, I’m sorry to say we have not,” 
answered Ben. 

“ Oh ! No news ! ” The girl leaned against the 
door frame for support. “ I — I hoped ” 

“ We’ll do what we can to find your father,” said 
Gilbert, as he took her hand and walked into 
the house. “ Perhaps it is not so bad as you 
imagine.” 

“ I cannot bear the suspense ! ” In spite of her 
efforts to be calm the tears started to the girl’s eyes. 
“ Papa never left me like this before. And with 
everything gone wrong — and the city full of sol- 
diers, and bad Russians and Chinamen ” 

“ Gilbert has an idea we might learn something 
by going down to your father’s offices,” suggested 
Larry. “ Perhaps he left word with somebody 
there.” 

At this Grace Chase shook her head. “ I don’t 
think so — for there was nobody there — the last 
clerk left two weeks ago — and the porters are too 
ignorant to understand anything.” 

“ There won’t be any harm in trying,” said Gil- 


12 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


bert. “ That is, if you wish to trust us with the 
keys.” 

“ Why, of course, Captain Pennington. Here 
are all the keys I could find,” and she brought them 
from her writing-desk. “ Do you think I ought to 
notify the Japanese authorities of his disappear- 
ance ? ” 

“ We can do that for you — after we have done a 
little still hunting. The authorities have so many 
things to care for they can't pay much attention to 
private affairs just yet. I’d like to know one thing: 
Did your father carry much money with him when 
he left home? ” 

“ I know nothing about that.” 

“ He told you that he would be back in a few 
hours?” 

“ Yes.” 

“ He said nothing about attending to other busi- 
ness, or of taking a trip elsewhere ? ” 

“ Not a word — and he would surely have said 
something if such was his intention, for he knew 
how worried I was every time he went away from 
home.” 

“ Perhaps he sent you word and you didn’t get 
it,” said Larry, but he spoke more to quiet the girl 
than because he thought such was the fact. 

“ There was nothing in the desk here that could 


AFFAIRS IN PORT ARTHUR 1 3 

give you a hint of what he might have in mind to 
do? ” asked Ben. 

“ Not a scrap, Captain Russell — I went through 
everything half a dozen times.” 

“ Then we may as well go to the office at once.” 

“ Do so — and if you discover anything, let me 
know immediately ; won’t you ? ” 

“ Certainly we’ll let you know,” replied Gilbert. 
“ By the way, you have had no trouble here since 
your father has been gone, have you ? ” 

“No, for I keep the house locked up and let the 
old woman who is living with me do the marketing. 
But I had a scare yesterday,” went on Grace, and 
gave a little shiver. 

“ How was that ? ” asked Ben quickly. 

“ Do you remember that Cossack who wanted to 
rob me at the time you came here for shelter? 
Well, unless I am greatly mistaken, he passed the 
house yesterday afternoon. He was all bundled up 
in a fur coat, but I am almost positive it was the 
same fellow. He tried to look into one of the win- 
dows, but a Japanese detachment came along and 
he ran out of sight.” 

“ I wish I had been here ! ” cried the young cap- 
tain. “ I’d like nothing better than to put that 
brute under arrest. I’ll tell you what I’ll do. I’ll 
have a Japanese guard sent here to protect 


14 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

you. I know I can have it done through Major 
Okopa.” 

“ Oh, that will be a relief ! ” And for a moment 
the girl’s face brightened. “ I am so afraid that 
Cossack will come back ! ” 

“ If he does, shoot him on the spot,” cried Larry. 
“ That is what such rascals deserve. Miss Chase, 
you ought to have a gun or a pistol.” 

“ There is a pistol in the house.” 

“ Then keep it where you can use it,” added Gil- 
bert grimly. 

A few additional words passed and then the three 
young Americans left the residence. Grace Chase 
looked after them wistfully, and a moment later 
locked the door and bolted it. 

“ Oh, if only they find poor, dear papa ! ” she 
sighed. “ If only they find him ! But he may be 
dead ! ” And then she burst into a fit of violent 
weeping. The anxiety of the past forty-eight hours 
had broken her down completely. 

“ There is only one thing about it,” said Ben, as 
soon as they were out of hearing. “We have got 
to find Mr. Chase, or find out what has become of 
him. This suspense is enough to kill his daughter.” 

“ It makes my heart ache to look at her,” an- 
swered his brother. “ A girl like her doesn’t de- 
serve such trouble. By the way, do you imagine 


AFFAIRS IN PORT ARTHUR 1 5 

that Cossack had anything to do with Mr. Chase’s 
disappearance? ” 

“ That’s a question that arose in my mind,” said 
Gilbert. “ Perhaps he knows more about the 
Chases than we imagine.” 

They talked the situation over as they hurried 
along from one street to another, but could arrive at 
no satisfactory solution of the problem. Reaching 
the offices the Anglo-Chinese Trading Company oc- 
cupied, Gilbert unlocked the main door and went 
inside, followed by the others. Passing through one 
apartment they came to a small room which had 
been Mr. Chase’s private “ den.” 

“ Everything looks all right here,” observed Ben, 
as they gazed around. 

A roll-top desk was unlocked and opened, and 
they took a hasty survey of the papers within. 

“ Nothing here out of the ordinary,” came from 
Gilbert. “ Some business matters and all perfectly 
straight.” 

“ Here are the scraps of a note written in Rus- 
sian,” said Larry, who was bending over a waste- 
basket. “ Gilbert, you know a little of the lan- 
guage. Can you make it out ? ” 

“ I can try,” answered the young Southerner 

The bits of paper were put together with care and 
Gilbert spelled out one word after another. 


l6 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ As near as I can make it, it’s a demand for 
money,” he said slowly. “ It is signed Olaf Pallak. 
For some reason or other he wants three thousand 
rubles 

“ About twenty-three hundred dollars,” said 
Larry. “ What for, do you think? ” 

“ It’s a threat, too,” added Gilbert. “ Pallak 
wants it paid at once.” 

“ Perhaps it is a clew,” suggested Ben. “ Any- 
way, we had better keep those scraps of paper.” 

“ I’ll certainly do that,” answered his chum, 
and stowed them away in the pocket of his army 
coat. 

The waste-basket contained nothing else, and 
they continued their hunt through the offices, com- 
ing at last to a back apartment which was littered 
with old boxes and barrels. 

“ Nothing more,” was Ben’s comment, and he 
gave a long sigh. “ What’s the next thing to be 
done? ” 

Gilbert did not answer, nor did Larry. The 
young Jack-tar was standing on a barrel, and now 
he applied one eye to a round opening in a thick 
wooden shutter over one of the windows. 

“ I guess you can’t see anything but the front of 
the warehouse, can you?” questioned Gilbert, after 
a few seconds of silence. 


AFFAIRS IN PORT ARTHUR 1 7 

“ That’s about all,” was the slow answer. “ The 
warehouse is tightly closed, too, and — wait ! ” 
“What’s up, Larry?” asked Ben. 

“ A man is hanging around out there — a fellow in 
a thick fur overcoat. He is coming this way ! ” 

“ Let me look.” Ben mounted to a hole in the 
shutter of the next window. “ Gracious ! As true 
as I live it’s that Cossack who tried to rob Grace 
Chase!” 


CHAPTER III 


WALKING INTO A TRAP 

It is needless to go into the particulars of how 
Captain Ben Russell had first met the Cossack 
whom he had now discovered lurking around the 
rear of the offices of the Anglo-Chinese Trading 
Company. He was a brutal fellow who had tried 
to rob Grace Chase during her father’s absence from 
home and would undoubtedly have succeeded, had 
not the young American appeared on the scene and 
caused him to flee. 

“ You are sure of the man? ” questioned Gilbert. 

“ I am.” Ben leaped down to the floor. “ I’m 
going to collar him, if I can.” 

“ Let me go with you,” returned Larry. “ He 
may prove too much of a handful for you alone.” 

“ We may as well all go,” said Gilbert. “ No- 
body else seems to be in this vicinity just now.” 

So it was decided, and a moment later the three 
young Americans left the offices by the front way. 
Gilbert turned to the left and Ben and Larry to the 
right, and they came upon the Cossack just as he 
18 



Larry caught the iron bar and twisted it from the man’s 
grasp. — Page 19. 






















































































. 




















































































WALKING INTO A TRAP 19 

was in the act of trying to pry open a shutter with 
a long iron bar. 

“ So I’ve caught you again, eh? ” said Ben, as he 
grabbed the brutal-looking fellow by the arm. “ I 
don’t think you’re going to get away so quick this 
time.” 

“ Stop ! Don’t touch me ! ” roared the man, in 
the Cossack dialect. “ Dogs of Americans, let me 
be ! ” But Ben only held him the tighter while Gil- 
bert also took hold. Without hesitation Larry 
caught the iron bar and twisted it from the man’s 
grasp. 

“ What are you doing here ? ” was the question 
put by Ben. But the Cossack stared blankly, for he 
could not understand a word of English. 

“ You’ll have to talk Russian to him,” said Larry. 

“ Let us take him around into the office,” sug- 
gested Gilbert. 

The Cossack did not want to go, but when Ben 
tapped his pistol suggestively he changed his mind 
and shambled along in a hangdog fashion. Once 
in the office they made the man stand in a corner 
and locked the door so that he could not get away. 
This filled the fellow with fear, for he imagined he 
was going to be knouted or subjected to even a 
worse punishment. It may be mentioned here that 
knouting, or whipping with a rope’s end, is very 


20 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


common in the Russian country. Sometimes the 
knout is made of rough rawhide and each blow cuts 
like a knife. 

“ Do not dare to touch me ! ” he muttered. “ Do 
not dare ! ” And he glared at them as might a wolf 
caught in a trap. 

“ Can you understand English?” questioned Ben. 

The Cossack shook his head. 

“Can you understand me?” put in Gilbert, in 
badly broken Russian. Since coming to Port 
Arthur on business he had picked up many words 
of the language. 

“ What want you of me — I am an innocent man,” 
grumbled the Cossack. 

“ What are you doing around here? ” 

At this the fellow offered a long explanation, 
three-quarters of which Gilbert could not under- 
stand. 

“ What does he say ? ” asked Ben. 

“ I can’t make out, excepting that he wants to 
find some friend who used to work for the Anglo- 
Chinese Company. I reckon it’s only a made-up 
yarn.” 

“ Ask him if he knows Mr. Chase,” came from 
Larry. 

The question was put and the Cossack replied 
that he had once worked for Mr. Chase, at the docks 


WALKING INTO A TRAP 


21 


where the ships of the company were in the habit 
of unloading. 

“ Tell me where Mr. Chase is now,” went on Gil- 
bert. “ Don’t say you don’t know, for I know 
better.” 

He spoke so sharply that the prisoner cringed 
back and his eyes fell. 

“ I — I not see him long time,” he stammered, in 
Russian. 

“ Where did you see him last ? ” 

Again the Cossack hesitated. Gilbert caught him 
by the shoulder and shook him. 

“ See here, you had best tell me the truth, you 
dog!” he cried. “If you won’t, we’ll hand you 
over to the Japanese guard and tell them how you 
tried to rob Miss Chase. Do you know what 
they’ll do with you? Shoot you on the spot, most 
likely.” 

This threat seemed to have the desired effect and 
the Cossack shivered from head to foot. 

“ Let me go, sire captain ! ” he pleaded. “ Let 
me go ! I am no bad man ! I was penniless when 
I tried to take the money from the young lady. I 
and my wife and children were starving. I have 
done no harm to Mr. Chase. I know he has dis- 
appeared, but I had no hand in it, no, not I, I give 
you my word ! ” 


22 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“Do you know Olaf Pallak?” questioned Gil- 
bert suddenly. 

“Ha! you know him! You suspect, not so? 
Perhaps you are right — I do not know for certain. 
But Pallak was Mr. Chase’s enemy, yes.” The 
Cossack gazed shrewdly at the three Americans. 
“ Find Olaf Pallak and you may learn much! ” 

“ It looks to me as if he was telling the truth,” 
came from Larry, when Gilbert had translated the 
Cossack’s words. “ Don’t forget the scraps of 
paper we found in the waste-basket.” 

“ Do you know where Olaf Pallak is ? ” asked the 
young Southerner, in his broken Russian. 

“Perhaps.” 

“ Will you take us to him? ” 

“ If I do, you will not harm me? ” 

“ If you do not, you’ll certainly get into big trou- 
ble,” returned Gilbert grimly. 

The Cossack tried to expostulate, but finally said 
he would conduct them to where Olaf Pallak might 
be found. The four went outside, and the offices 
were locked up with care. 

It was a dark day, with a suggestion of more 
snow in the air, and only a few people were stirring. 
The Japanese guards sought places of shelter when- 
ever they could, for the sons of Nippon were not 
used to such wintry weather. 


WALKING INTO A TRAP 


23 


“ Don’t attempt to escape,” said Gilbert, as he 
ranged alongside of the Cossack. Ben came up on 
the other side, while Larry brought up the rear. 

The way lay up the street for several blocks and 
then around a corner in the direction of the poorer 
quarter of Port Arthur. At one point they had to 
climb over a huge pile of debris, and at another leap 
over several holes in the roadway. 

“ Here is where I sneaked along when I escaped 
from that Russian prison,” said Ben. “ I hid over 
in yonder warehouse, and I saw some of the 
shells that did this ripping up. It was a horrible 
sight.” 

“ You were lucky to escape without injury,” re- 
plied Larry. He thought the world of his big 
brother Ben. 

At length the Cossack led the three young 
Americans into a narrow alleyway lined on one side 
with warehouses and on the other by stables and 
houses which had been occupied by the poorer class 
of Russians, The houses were nearly all deserted, 
for many of the Russians had left when the siege 
of the city first began. 

“ How much further have we to go? ” demanded 
Gilbert, as the Cossack seemed to hesitate. 

“ Not much further,” was the answer. “ Olaf 
Pallak, his house is burned down. He keeps himself 


24 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


with his old aunt at the Bashquada. A few steps 
more, captain.” 

They passed under a stone archway and into a 
badly paved courtyard. Then they came to another 
alleyway, at the end of which was a stone building. 

“ He is here — at the rear,” said the Cossack. 

“ He is suffering from a bruised foot and cannot 
walk very well.” 

“ Gilbert, we must be on our guard,” whispered 
Ben. 

“ Just what I was thinking,” put in Larry. The 
young sailor looked around anxiously. “ This looks 
like a regular den of some sort.” 

“ Haven’t you your pistols? I have mine,” came 
from the young Southerner. 

All felt to see if their weapons were ready for use. 
The Cossack noticed it and shrugged his shoulders. 

“ Have no fear,” he said smoothly. “ Olaf Pal- 
lak is not the one to fight. He is a peaceful man, 
although very shrewd.” 

They entered a room of the stone building and 
came to a back hallway which was gloomy. 

“ The next room,” whispered the Cossack. 
“ Wait, I will get a light. But let him not know 
that I betrayed him, I beseech you ! ” 

A door was pushed open cautiously, and they 
walked forward. Then, without warning the Cos- 


WALKING INTO A TRAP 


25 


sack leaped backward and gave Larry a shove that 
sent the young sailor up against Gilbert, and both 
went sprawling. Ben sprang towards the man and 
drew his pistol, but before he could do more a door 
was slammed shut, and all heard a big bolt shot into 
place. 

“ Caged ! ” muttered Gilbert, struggling up. 

“ Caught, like a lot of lambs,” grumbled Larry. 
He leaped for the door and shook it. “ What 
greenies we were to trust him ! ” 

“ Open that door ! ” called out Gilbert, in Russian. 
“ Open it at once, or it will be the worse for you ! ” 

No answer came back to his demand and he too 
took hold of the barrier and shook it. 

“ He has gone,” came from Ben, and listening, 
they heard the Cossack’s heavy footsteps retreating. 

“ It must have been a fake, this taking us to see 
Olaf Pallak,” said Larry. “ He was afraid of arrest 
and so brought us here to get us out of the way.” 

The three pushed upon the door with all their 
might, but could not budge it. 

“ Shall we call for help ? ” questioned Gilbert. He 
was deeply chagrined over the manner in which the 
Cossack had outwitted them. 

“ I don’t think it will do any good,” answered 
Ben. “ More than likely this whole ranch is used 
by nothing but Russians and Cossacks. They’ll 


2 6 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

stand in with each other and help that rascal all they 
can.” 

The room in which they found themselves was 
pitch-dark. Ben had matches, and striking one, he 
lit a small pocket light he carried. The dim light 
showed them a bare apartment of almost solid brick 
and stone. Opposite the door were two small win- 
dows, grated with iron and opening upon a hallway 
running to parts unknown. 

“Well, what do you make of it?” came from 
Larry, after all three had completed their examina- 
tion. 

“We are prisoners,” answered his brother bit- 
terly. 

“ Do you think we can get out? ” 

“ That remains to be seen.” 

“ We must get out ! ” broke in Gilbert. “ I’m not 
going to stay here. There is no telling what that 
fellow will do to us when he comes back. Why, 
rather than let us get him into trouble, he may even 
kill us ! ” 


CHAPTER IV 


AN UNSATISFACTORY INTERVIEW 

It may seem strange to some of my young 
readers that such a thing as has just been related 
could happen in a place under strong Japanese 
guard, but they must remember that Port Arthur 
was in reality a Russian city, built and occupied 
largely by people of the Czar, and that as yet 
the Japanese had not secured that hold upon the 
place which came a month later. A part of General 
Stoessel’s army was still at hand, awaiting a chance 
to embark, and the Japanese authorities were watch- 
ing these soldiers closely, fearful of some outbreak. 
During the bombardment many of the better class of 
people living in Port Arthur had left, and the 
lower element had run riot, pilfering whenever they 
got the chance and carrying the law in their own 
hands. 

The building to which the Cossack had brought 
the three young Americans was an old rookery 
which dated back to the time when Port Arthur 


27 


28 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


had first become a place of importance. It had been 
used as a warehouse, a barracks, a prison, and a 
tenement successively, and was foul and ill-smelling 
from top to bottom. At present a handful of Rus- 
sians lived in one end of it, while a score of China- 
men occupied the other end, which had several big 
apartments underground. Overhead, more than 
half the roof had tumbled in from shell fire, and 
the upper floor was a mass of bricks, stones, dirt, and 
snow. 

Having made an examination of the room in 
which they found themselves, the three Americans 
looked at each other in perplexity. Larry gave a 
long, low whistle. 

“ We’re as tight here as if we were in a ship’s 
brig,” he said laconically. 

“ I think I may as well blow out the light,” came 
from his brother. “We may need it later. It’s 
not more than half full of alcohol.” 

Gilbert nodded and the light was put out, leaving 
them in almost total darkness. Through the grated 
windows came a faint ray, just sufficient “ to keep 
them from bumping into each other,” as Larry put 
it. 

“ I wonder what the next move of that rascal will 
be,” said Gilbert. 

“ I wish he’d come back and open the door. I 


AN UNSATISFACTORY INTERVIEW 29 

think I could give him a warm reception/’ returned 
Ben grimly. 

A good hour passed — a period of time that 
seemed unusually long just then. Once they heard 
footsteps in the distance, but that was all. 

“ Perhaps they’ll leave us here to starve to death,” 
said Ben, drawing a long breath and stretching him- 
self. 

“ Oh, Ben, do you think they’d do that? ” 

“ Well, you know what some of these rascals are, 
Larry — you’ve had your fill of them while in the 
navy — and on board of the old Columbia. You re- 
member Semmel and Peterson.” 

“ Indeed I do — and some other rascals just as 
big, too.” The youth paused. “ Wonder if we 
can’t break out through either one of those win- 
dows? ” 

“ I was thinking of that,” added Gilbert. He 
walked to one of the openings and examined the 
iron grating. “ Pretty thick, and set right in the 
masonry. What ever made them build such a den 
as this? ” 

From one window they went to the next. While 
Ben was examining the grating a distant voice 
broke upon his ear. It was that of a Chinaman, and 
he was singing. 

“ Listen ! ” said the young captain. They did so, 


30 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


and presently the Celestial came closer, until he was 
within a few feet of the windows. 

“ Hullo there ! ” called out Gilbert. “ Come here, 
you ! ” he added, in Chinese, remembering some 
words he had picked up while fighting the Boxers, 
as related in “ On to Pekin.” 

“ Who calls Hop Wang? ” asked the Celestial, as 
he halted. 

“ Come here,” repeated Gilbert. And then as 
the Chinaman came close up to one of the windows, 
he added : “ Can you talk English ? ” 

“Englees? Yes, Hop Wang talk allee slame 
Englees, Lussian.” 

“ Can you open the door for us ? ” 

“ Lopen door?” 

“ Yes, it’s locked from the outside. A fellow 
played a trick on us. Open the door and I’ll pay 
you.” 

At the mention of pay the eyes of the Celestial 
brightened. 

“ Play Hop Wang cash f ” 

“Yes,” and the young Southerner held up a shin- 
ing silver piece. 

Without waiting for more the Chinaman left the 
vicinity of the window and they heard him shuffle 
down a passageway. Then came a rattling on the 
door. 


AN UNSATISFACTORY INTERVIEW 3 1 

“ Thank fortune we’ve struck a real friend,” mur- 
mured Larry ; but an instant later his face fell. 

“ Hop Wang no lopen dooree. He got big lock, 
no key. Give key, lopen dooree.” 

“ The bolt must have a lock attached,” cried Ben, 
in dismay. “ And that Cossack walked off with the 
key.” 

“ Come to the window ! ” called out Gilbert, and 
the Chinaman did as requested. 

“ You are sure you can’t open the door ? ” asked 
Larry. 

The Celestial shook his head, grinning in a 
friendly manner as he did so. 

“Do you belong around here?” questioned 
Gilbert. 

“ Yes, Hop Wang livee dare ” — pointing with his 
long forefinger. 

“ Did you see us come in? ” 

“ Yes.” 

“ Do you know the fellow who was with us, the 
Cossack ? ” 

“Cossack? Yes, him name allee samee Bosch- 
noff.” 

“ Do you know a Russian named Olaf Pallak ? ” 
asked Ben. 

Again the Celestial nodded. “ Olaf Pallak here 
yesterday. He an’ Boschnoff workee ’gether.” 


32 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Then this Boschnoff and that Olaf Pallak 
must be in league with each other!” ejaculated 
Larry. 

“ Let us find out if the Chinaman knows anything 
about Mr. Chase,” came from his brother. 

The Celestial was questioned and it was learned 
that he knew Nathan Chase by sight, having once 
worked in one of the warehouses of the Anglo- 
Chinese Trading Company. He said that Mr. 
Chase and Olaf Pallak were also well acquainted 
with each other and there had once been a quarrel 
between the two men, the particulars of which he 
had heard from other Chinamen. He added that 
Pallak had sold out his holdings in Port Arthur 
and was about to leave the city with a small 
fortune. It was likely Boschnoff would go with 
him. 

“ All of which doesn’t throw any light on the dis- 
appearance of Mr. Chase,” said Ben. 

“ Nor does it give us our liberty,” added Larry. 
“ Gilbert, you had better pay him to bring the 
Japanese guard here.” 

“ I will,” returned the young Southerner, and the 
bargain was struck on the spot. Hop Wang wanted 
his pay in advance and received three pieces of sil- 
ver, one from each of the prisoners. 

“ I can’t get it out of my head but that Olaf Pal- 


AN UNSATISFACTORY INTERVIEW 


33 


lak is responsible for Mr. Chase’s disappearance,” 
said Gilbert. “ I’d just like to lay my hands on the 
fellow.” 

Having received the money the Chinaman left the 
vicinity of the grated windows and started to de- 
part from the building by a side passage. Scarcely 
had he turned a corner, however, when he ran into 
two burly men, who hurled him flat and nearly 
choked him to death. 

“ Ha ! so that is what you would do ! ” growled 
the Cossack named Boschnoff. “You would help 
the dogs of Americans? It shall go ill with you,” 
and he clutched the Celestial by the throat until the 
man’s eyes were almost forced from his head. 

“ Hold him,” came from the second man. He 
was a dark-eyed individual with a shock of hair and 
a long, heavy beard. 

“ Don’t worry; he shall not get away, Olaf,” an- 
swered the Cossack. 

“ We came in time,” returned Olaf Pallak, with a 
grimace. “ March him up to the little chamber on 
the second floor.” And despite the Celestial’s pro- 
testations this was done and the almond-eyed man 
was locked up in a room from which he did not 
escape until twenty-four hours later. 

Having secured the Chinaman, Olaf Pallak and 
Boschnoff went below again and around to the 


34 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


grated windows of the room in which our friends 
were confined. 

“ You send for the guard — we are here,” said 
Olaf Pallak, in broken English. “ It will be a 
grand honor to serve such nice Americans. What 
can we do for you ? ” 

His tone was one of bitter mockery, and it must be 
confessed that the hearts of Gilbert, Ben, and Larry 
sank within them. They realized on the instant 
that the Chinaman had either played them false or 
been put out of the way. 

“ Who are you?” demanded Ben, as soon as he 
could recover. 

“ I am Olaf Pallak at your service, sire.” 

“ The man who sent the threatening letter to 
Nathan Chase,” put in Larry, before he had stopped 
to think twice. 

“ Ha ! what do you know of that letter ? ” cried 
the Russian, and his face grew full of fear and 
anger. 

“ We want you to set us free,” said Gilbert 
sternly. 

“ So Mr. Chase told you of the letter ? That is 
another black marl^ against his account ! ” muttered 
Olaf Pallak. “ But I shall square it yet, I shall 
square it fully. Wait till I am done with him — yes, 
wait ! Ha ! ha ! ” He laughed harshly. 


AN UNSATISFACTORY INTERVIEW 35 

“ Will you let us out, or not? ” demanded Ben. 

“ I shall let you out, certainly, sire. But not just 
yet. I have other matters of importance to attend 
to first.” 

“ How long are you going to keep us here? ” put 
in Larry. 

“ Only a few days — perhaps a week.” 

“ A week ! ” The young tar started back. “ I’ve 
got to get to my ship. They’ll count me a deserter 
if I don’t!” 

More talk was cut short by Boschnoff, who had 
walked to a turn of the passageway. He came back 
in suppressed excitement and whispered something 
into Olaf Pallak’s ear. Then the two men hurried 
off, leaving the three prisoners once more to them- 
selves. 

“We are certainly in a pickle,” remarked Ben, as 
he took a turn up and down the room. “ They evi- 
dently don’t intend to let us out until they get good 
and ready.” 

“ I guess I put my foot in it by mentioning the 
letter,” added Larry gloomily. “ I should have 
waited until we were at liberty. Now he’ll know 
we were on his track.” 

“ He is surely responsible for Mr. Chase’s dis- 
appearance.” 

“And he won’t hesitate to do anything that comes 


36 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


in his head to do,” added Ben. “ He’s about as 
ugly a customer as I’ve met in a long time.” 

There seemed to be nothing more to say just then 
and the three relapsed into silence, which was 
broken by Larry, who suddenly ran towards the 
door and sniffed the air coming in through one of 
the cracks. 

“ Smoke ! ” he cried. “ Smoke, and getting 
thicker too ! ” 

“ Smoke ? ” repeated his brother and Gilbert, in a 
breath. They, too, came towards the door. They 
felt a strong draught and heard a distant cry of 
alarm. 

“ There’s a fire somewhere,” went on the young 
sailor. “ It must be in this building! ” 


CHAPTER V 


THE OLD POWDER HOUSE 

“ If this building is on fire, we’ve got to get out, 
by hook or by crook, and do it quickly, too ! ” came 
from Gilbert. 

“ Right you are,” returned Ben. “ I don’t want 
to run any risk of being caught like a rat in a trap.” 

“ If we only had something with which to smash 
out one of those gratings,” put in Larry. He shook 
the iron with all his strength. “ It won’t budge, 
and that is all there is to it.” 

“ The smoke is growing thicker ! ” said his 
brother, and Ben was right. They could smell it 
plainly. 

“ Light that pocket lamp again,” said Gilbert, 
and it was done. “ I thought perhaps we had missed 
some sort of opening from this room,” he added. 

“ No opening up there,” was Larry’s comment, 
after inspecting the ceiling. “ It’s solid beams and 
planks. We’d need an ax to get through there.” 

“ What about the floor ? ” 


37 


38 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The young tar got down on his hands and knees, 
and so did the others. In the center the flooring 
appeared to be solid, but at one end was a trap-door 
of wood set in some masonry. 

By this time the smoke was coming in at the win- 
dows also and they could hear many shouts of alarm 
from a distance. The fire was in a building next 
door and as yet no engines had arrived to battle 
with the conflagration. 

“ Where does the trap-door lead to? ” questioned 
Gilbert. 

“ I’ll soon see,” answered Larry, and shoved the 
blade of his jack-knife into a crack, for there was 
no ring or handle. The trap-door came up an inch, 
and the young sailor and the Southerner clutched it 
with their finger tips and gave several tugs, and 
then it fell back, sending them sprawling. 

Beneath the trap-door was an opening not over 
two feet square and twice as deep. It was of brick, 
and to one side was a drain pipe about eighteen 
inches in diameter and perfectly dry. 

“ Where does it lead to ? ” questioned Ben, as he 
held down the light. 

“ Seems to lead straight ahead,” answered his 
brother. “ Wait, I’ll crawl inside and see.” 

He disappeared and his brother and Gilbert 
waited anxiously for him to return. The smoke 


THE OLD POWDER HOUSE 


39 

was now so thick that they had to cough, while the 
tears ran down their cheeks. 

“ It’s all right, come along ! ” came in a muffled 
voice from the drain, and they saw Larry’s legs re- 
appear. Then he moved forward once more and 
they followed him, Ben closing the trap-door, but 
not very tightly. 

“ I saw daylight ahead and that was enough for 
me,” said the young sailor. “ It’s better than stay- 
ing in that prison, to be choked to death by 
smoke.” 

Fortunately for them the drain was nearly a 
straight one and not over two hundred feet long. 
It came to an end in a small courtyard, where there 
was a well hole and a grating that could be easily 
removed. As they came into the daylight some 
burning embers landed at their feet and one struck 
Gilbert on the shoulder. 

“ Hi ! this won’t do ! ” cried the young South- 
erner. “ We’ve got to get out of here ! ” 

The only opening that presented itself was a door 
leading into’ a small brick building. On the outside 
of this building was a tall iron fence with posts of 
stone. 

“ I know what this place is, or was ! ” cried Gil- 
bert. “ It used to be a Russian powder house ! ” 

“ What! right here in the city? ” queried Ben. 


40 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Yes — they placed powder here as soon as there 
was talk of war with Japan.” 

“ The powder must have been used up during the 
defense of the port,” came from Larry. “ They say 
General Stoessel was very low on ammunition when 
he surrendered.” 

Not knowing how to turn, they entered the pow- 
der house, which appeared to be deserted. Scarcely 
had they done so when they saw six burly Rus- 
sians approaching, one of the party being Olaf 
Pallak. 

“ Are you certain the powder is still here? ” asked 
one of the newcomers of Pallak. 

“ Yes,” was the short answer. 

“ Then we may as well touch it off, rather than 
let it fall into the hands of the dogs of Nippon! ” 
was the cry. “ To get it out past the guards would 
be impossible.” 

As the Russians came in the young Americans 
crouched out of sight behind a stairs leading to a 
second story. They heard an ax used and then fol- 
lowed a whispered consultation. 

“ Powder ! ” whispered Gilbert. “ And they are 
setting a slow match ! ” 

“ Then we’ve got to get out ! ” returned Ben. 

“ Now for a light,” said one of the Russians, and 
they heard a match struck. It was applied to the 



They stared in horror at the slow match . — Page 41. 





THE OLD POWDER HOUSE 


41 


slow match, and then the Russians ran out of the 
building, slamming the door after them. 

On the instant the three young Americans leaped 
from their place of concealment. They stared in 
horror at the slow match which was sizzing spite- 
fully. They saw it led to a corner where were lo- 
cated at least a dozen kegs of powder ! Should that 
powder go off, it would blow building and all in it 
to pieces ! 

It was quick-witted Ben who was the first to act. 
One leap took him to the slow match, and down 
came his foot on the hissing thing. Fortunately 
there was snow on the young captain’s shoe, and 
this put out the flame instantly. 

“ Is — is it out ? ” gasped Larry. He could 
scarcely speak. 

“ Yes, it’s out,” answered his brother, in a 
strangely unnatural voice. “ Lucky I reached 
it, too ! ” 

“ Ben, you’ve saved our lives ! ” cried Gilbert. 
“ Another minute and we would all have been blown 
to pieces ! ” 

“ The best thing we can do now is to get out of 
this and notify the authorities,” said Ben, as soon as 
he could steady his voice. “ Remember, the fire 
is coming this way ! ” 

“ Yes, and that powder is open! ” added Larry. 


42 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Waiting no longer, they ran out of the old powder 
house and to a gate in the fence. They found it 
unlocked, the Russians having been in too much of a 
hurry to fasten it. 

Out on the street they paused, and looking in one 
direction saw the Russians, including Olaf Pallak, 
gazing at them in amazement. Then Pallak mut- 
tered something to his companions, and the crowd, 
accompanied also by Boschnoff, came towards the 
young Americans on the run. 

“ They mean mischief! ” cried Gilbert. “ We’ve 
got to fight for it ! ” 

“ And we can fight ! ” answered Ben, and drew his 
pistol. Seeing this the others did the same, for 
even when off duty they carried their side-arms 
with them wherever they went. 

At the sight of the weapons the Russians and 
Cossacks came to a halt. They had only a few fire- 
arms among them, the majority having been sur- 
rendered to the Japanese. One man picked up a 
stone, and another a billet of wood. 

“ Keep your distance! ” cried Gilbert, in Russian. 
“ If you don’t we’ll fire upon you ! ” 

He had scarcely spoken when one of the Russians 
fired his pistol and the ball passed directly between 
Ben and Larry. They returned the shot and Gil- 
bert also fired, and two of the enemy were hit, but 


THE OLD POWDER HOUSE 43 

not seriously wounded. Then came a shout from a 
distance, and a Japanese detachment of fire-fighters 
hove into view, carrying water buckets, and fol- 
lowed by a local fire engine. 

“ Hurrah ! our soldiers are coming ! ” cried Ben, 
and waved his hand. “ This way ! The Russians 
are firing at us ! ” he called loudly. 

“ The game is finished ! ” muttered Olaf Pallak, 
in dismay, and turning, he fled down a side street 
and into a narrow alleyway, followed by his friends. 

“ What is the trouble here ? ” demanded the of- 
ficer in charge of the Japanese detachment. 

“ Trouble enough,” answered Gilbert. “We 
caught those fellows trying to blow up this powder 
house. Then they opened fire on us and we fired in 
return.” 

“ Blow up this powder house? Is there powder 
here?” 

“ Yes, a dozen kegs or more.” 

“ Humph! And the fire coming this way! We 
shall have to work hard to save the place.” 

Several orders were issued, and while one portion 
of the soldiers fought the fire, others covered the 
kegs of powder with blankets and carried them to a 
place of safety. When another detachment came 
up it was sent in chase of the Russians. 

“ Let us go along,” cried Larry enthusiastically. 


44 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The others were willing and set out without de- 
lay. But though the search was kept up for the 
balance of the day and far into the night, not a 
single trace of Olaf Pallak and Boschnoff could be 
found. The quarters in which both had been living 
were burned, and their families as well as them- 
selves had disappeared. 

“ I hope that Chinaman got out safe,” said Larry, 
but it was not until later that they learned how Hop 
Wang had been rescued by some friends after the 
fire was a thing of the past. 

As soon as they were able to do so, the three 
young Americans reported the disappearance of 
Nathan Chase to the Japanese commander then in 
charge of Port Arthur. He listened to their story 
with interest, and when they had finished asked 
many questions. 

“ I shall do what I can in this affair,” said he. 
“ But, Captain Pennington and Captain Russell, 
you know how matters are upset here and what 
amount of work is waiting to be done. I am afraid 
it will be hard for us to do anything that will give 
satisfaction.” 

“ Mr. Chase was an influential American citizen,” 
said Gilbert. “ It won’t do at all to let him drop 
out of sight in this fashion. The American news- 
papers will make a great deal of capital out of it — 


THE OLD POWDER HOUSE 45 

and I shall be sorry to hear of such a thing happen- 
ing.” 

“ We shall do our best.” 

Thus the interview ended, but Gilbert’s last words 
had the effect of “ waking up ” the Japanese author- 
ities and a stronger search than ever was made for 
the missing man. 

The three young Americans felt heavy-hearted 
enough when they went to visit Grace Chase on the 
following day. She listened to their tale with bated 
breath and sighed deeply, while the tears stood in 
her eyes. 

“ I know you have done all that you could,” she 
said, “ and I thank you very much. Poor, dear 
papa must be dead ! ” And she began to sob. 

“ No, I don’t think he is dead,” answered Ben. 

“ Then where is he ? ” 

“ I believe Olaf Pallak and his followers have 
carried him off.” 

“ But why should they carry him off? ” 

“ I don’t know exactly why, but I think because 
Pallak wants your father to aid him in some busi- 
ness scheme. In other words, he wants to make 
money out of your father.” 

After this the matter was talked over for an hour, 
but without satisfaction. Then our friends left, Ben 
and Gilbert promising to call again in a day or two. 


46 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ And won’t you come, too?” asked Grace, of 
Larry. 

“ I can’t do it,” answered the young sailor. 

“ And why not? ” 

“ I’ve got to rejoin my ship.” 


CHAPTER VI 


ABOARD THE WARSHIP 

What Larry said about rejoining his ship was 
true. He had received word that the repairs to the 
Shohirika were complete and that the warship was 
to leave Port Arthur on the following morning. 
Her destination was unknown to all save those in 
command. 

“ Larry, it’s too bad you have got to* leave us,” 
said his brother, on retiring that night. “ But such 
are the fortunes of war.” 

“ When do you leave for the front, Ben ? ” 

“ Word may come in at any moment. Major 
Okopa told us to be ready to march any time after 
to-tiight.” 

“ That will leave Miss Chase alone with her 
troubles.” 

“ Yes, so far as we are concerned, but Gilbert 
and I are going to get an old man to stay with her. 
The man used to work for the Richmond Importing 
Company and Gilbert feels that he can be trusted to 
protect her. It’s the best we can do.” 


47 


48 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

It was scarcely sunrise on the following morning 
when a guard of the barracks came to Larry and 
told him that an old sailor wished to see him. It 
was his old-time friend, Luke Striker, more bronzed 
and weather-beaten than ever. 

“ Thought as how Fd better make sure you was 
coming aboard ship bright an’ early,” said Luke. 
“ I didn’t want to sail away without ye nohow ! f ’ 
And he gave Larry’s hand a squeeze that made the 
young tar wince. 

“ Don’t you fear about me,” was the answer. “ I 
should have been on my way in half an hour more.” 

“ How are you, Luke? ” was Ben’s cordial greet- 
ing, as he too shook hands, followed by Gilbert. 

“ Putty well, considerin’,” returned the old Yan- 
kee sailor. “ Thet cut I received in our last sea fight 
ain’t quite healed up yet. But I’m glad I’m around, 
when I think o’ the lot on us thet was killed! ” 

“ War is no play,” said Gilbert. “ And I 
shouldn’t wonder but that we’ve got a good bit of 
fighting to do still, before one side or the other cries 
quits.” 

“ I don’t know but that Walter was wise to give 
up fighting when he did,” went on Larry, referring 
to a brother who had served under Schley in Cuban 
waters. “ The more a fellow serves in the navy, the 
more the war spirit gets into his veins.” 


ABOARD THE WARSHIP 


49 


“ And it’s the same in the army,” added Gilbert. 
“ After fighting in China I made up my mind that 
I was done, and here I am, serving as hard as ever.” 

The three had been ready to get breakfast and 
now they made Luke come with them for a bite. 
Then came another handshaking and a few words in 
private between Larry and Ben, and the young 
sailor and his old friend hurried off to their ship. 
It was to be many a day before the brothers would 
meet again, and many strange and startling things 
were to occur in the meantime. 

As my old readers know, the Shohirika was a 
comparatively new warship of the Japanese navy, 
having been fitted out for service at Nagasaki less 
than a year before this story opens. She was a 
first-class vessel in every respect, carrying a battery 
of no mean proportions, and was manned by an ex- 
ceptionally good number of officers and men. She 
had done her full share in several battles and bom- 
bardments of importance, and Admiral Togo ex- 
pected even better accounts from her in the 
future. 

Because of his extensive knowledge of gunnery, 
acquired in the American navy, Luke Striker had 
been given the position of gunner on the Shohirika, 
and Larry had been made a gunner’s mate, much to 
his own satisfaction and the delight of his old 


50 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


friend. Both worked on the same piece, which the 
old Yankee had christened “ Betsy Jane,” after a 
favorite aunt. The gun crew under Luke was 
drilled to perfection and was the model for the en- 
tire ship. 

“ Well, it seems more natural to be here than 
ashore,” said Larry, when they were on the ship. 
“ I hate to leave Ben and Gilbert, but I do love to 
have the sea beneath me.” 

“ Because you're a nateral-born sailor, Larry,” 
answered Luke. “ It's the same with myself. 
Onct I went ashore an’ vowed I’d never sail the sea 
ag’in, an’ in less’n a week I had signed articles fer a 
two years’ cruise around Cape Horn ! ” 

“ Have you any idea where we are bound? ” 

“ No, exceptin’ I heard some talk o’ nosin’ around 
fer more Russian warships.” 

The day was chilly but clear, and the shipping in 
the harbor had taken on a more natural look than at 
any time since the bombardment of Port Arthur had 
begun. Two Japanese transports had come in. 
loaded with soldiers who were just being taken 
ashore, and a band was playing a lively military 
air. 

“ This certainly looks like business,” observed 
Larry. “ Evidently the campaign northward from 
Liao Yang is not to be dropped.” 


ABOARD THE WARSHIP 


51 


“ Most likely the army will move as soon as the 
weather permits/' said Steve Colton, who was 
another American gunner serving on the Japanese 
warship. “ You must remember, it’s bitterly cold 
up there just now." 

“ The Russians must have suffered terribly in 
their retreat from Liao Yang." 

“ Yes, they lost nearly all of their rations and a 
good part of their equipments." 

Previous to leaving the harbor there was a roll 
call, the crew being lined up on the deck for that 
purpose. Everything was as “ clean as a whistle " 
as Larry expressed it, and the men presented an ap- 
pearance that would have done credit to any navy in 
the world. Only two men were missing, and it was 
discovered that they had been rowed to another war- 
ship by mistake. 

“ I see we are going to have some new fellows 
in the crew," remarked Larry, when the roll-call and 
inspection were over. “ About thirty, all told." 

“ Yes, an' a good-lookin’ lot too," added Luke. 

“ There is one fellow in that crowd I’m sorry to 
see on this ship," said Steve Colton. “ That dark 
chap with a big wart on his nose. His name is 
Kino Nana, and he served with me on Admiral 
Togo’s flagship." 

“ What’s the matter with him ? ’’ questioned 


52 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

Larry. “ I noticed he wasn’t a very pleasant-look- 
ing fellow.” 

“ Oh, he thinks he is better than the rest of us. 
He has visited Manila and the Hawaiian Islands, 
and talks pretty good English. He wants to be- 
come a petty officer, but the powers that be don’t 
seem to want to make him one, and that’s what 
sours him.” 

“ Did you have trouble with him? ” 

“ Yes. We worked on the same gun and I could 
never get him to do his full duty. We had some 
words, and after that I had to watch him closely, for 
I was afraid he would play me foul.” 

“ If that’s the case I hope he doesn’t come near 
me,” replied Larry. 

“ An’ I don’t want him near me nuther,” added 
Luke. 

Less than half an hour later the Shohirika had 
steam up and was leaving the harbor of Port Arthur 
behind her. As they passed out from among the 
shipping they could see the sunken Russian ships 
plainly and also some of the forts which had been 
literally ripped asunder by the Japanese fire and by 
the explosion of their powder magazines. 

“ What terrible times the men in those forts must 
have had,” was Larry’s comment. “ I’m glad I 
wasn’t there.” 


ABOARD THE WARSHIP 


53 


“ The Russians have been beaten right along,” 
said Steve Colton. “ It seems to me they ought to 
be ready to give up pretty soon.” 

“ They are not beaten as much as that yet,” came 
from another. “ But they will be, by the time we 
are done with ’em.” 

By noon the warship had passed out of sight of 
the port and was plowing along nobly through Korea 
Bay. The course was southeast towards the Yellow 
Sea. 

“ I suppose we’re going to hunt for more Rus- 
sian warships,” said Larry, when the shore line 
could no longer be seen. 

“ Well, let ’em come,” returned Luke dryly. 
“ Reckon as how I’m ready fer ’em ! ” 

It was so cold the gunners were glad enough to 
keep below decks. A few spent their time in read- 
ing or in playing games, for there was no work to 
do. Larry had a button to sew on and went at the 
task cheerfully, for all sailors have to do their own 
sewing, both in the navy and the merchant service. 

The button had just been replaced when they 
heard loud talking and saw Steve Colton walking 
towards them, followed by the Japanese he had men- 
tioned, Kino Nana. 

“ I won’t warn you again,” Colton was saying. 
“ I want you to keep your distance.” 


54 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Don’t you talk to me ! ” was the angry answer. 
“ Kino Nana is a gentleman. All you Americans 
have what you call the big head ! ” 

“ Well, I’ll put a big head on you if you don’t 
keep your distance,” growled Colton, and then the 
Japanese disappeared down a side passageway. 

“ What’s the row now ? ” questioned Luke 
Striker. 

“ Oh, nothing new. We were looking over the 
cutlasses when that Jap put in his oar. He makes 
me sick, that fellow does. Every time he comes 
near me I feel like pitching him overboard! It 
isn’t so much what he says as the way he says it.” 

“ Evidently he doesn’t like Americans,” said 
Larry. “ He said we all had the big head.” 

“ He has an idea that because we are in the navy 
he and other Japs like him can’t get any sort of an 
officership. He wants to be a chief gunner, or 
magazine officer, or something like that, and he 
things we are standing in his way.” 

“ Is he any good at a gun? ” 

“ No. When we were on the Mikasa he had a 
try at one of the guns and made a regular fizzle of 
it. Afterwards he tried to excuse himself by saying 
the gun was out of order. But nobody would 
believe him, and he was sent back to where he 
belonged.” 


ABOARD THE WARSHIP 55 

“ I shouldn’t think a feller like thet would have 
many friends,” remarked the old Yankee sailor. 

“ Oh, any kind of a chap can make friends if he 
toadies to ’em in the right kind of a way,” returned 
Steve Colton. “ But the friends he makes are fel- 
lows of the same stripe as himself. I don’t believe 
the nicer class of Japs will have anything to do with 
him.” 

“ I hope he doesn’t come near me,” said Larry. 
“ I’ve had troubles enough in the past. It’s bad 
enough to fight the enemy without fighting any- 
body on your own ship — we found that out when we 
were on the Columbia; eh, Luke?” 

“ Right ye are, lad. Oh, it may be this Jap will 
keep his distance when he sees how many on us there 
are. All told we’ve got fourteen Yankee lads 
aboard, an’ he won’t dare to bother so big a crowd. 
If there were only one or two on us it might be dif- 
ferent.” 

At this Steve Colton shook his head doubtfully. 

“ That won’t make much difference to Kino 
Nana. He’s as foolish as he is pig-headed. He is 
bound to make trouble. I warn you to keep your 
eyes open. If you don’t, you may be sorry for it.” 

“ Well, I’ll keep my eyes open,” declared Larry. 
“ And if he bothers me I’ll pay him back in his own 
coin.” 


CHAPTER VII 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 

For several days affairs on the Shohirika passed 
quietly enough. During that time the course of the 
warship was often changed, and at night the big 
searchlight was used almost constantly. 

“ We’re hunting for more Russian warships, 
that’s certain,” said Larry to Luke. 

“ Well, if we are, we ain’t finding ’em,” was the 
reply. “ I rather reckon the Russians hev retired to 
count noses. This last crack they got was a putty 
heavy one.” 

“ Perhaps it will bring peace after all, Luke.” 

“ If it does, we’ll hear o’ it quick enough.” 

Every day there were various drills and exercises 
to attend. First came the gun and fire drills, and 
the drill to man the boats, and then came manual 
exercise and various exercises in the use of cutlasses 
and small arms. There tvas also a daily inspection 
of quarters, and woe to the man who did not have 
his ditty-box in proper shape or his hammock roll 
56 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 


5 7 


swung as it should be. The officers were strict and 
the least failure to “ toe the mark ” was punished 
by extra work, by loss of rations, or by confinement 
in the brig or ship’s jail. 

As the warship passed further to the southward 
the weather was milder and a good deal of the ice 
that had been floating in the water disappeared. 
Larry was not sorry to feel the change, which was 
also agreeable to Luke. 

“ Ain’t got no use fer bitter cold weather when 
I’m on the ocean,” remarked the Yankee tar. “ It 
puts me in mind o’ the time I sailed on the Nancy 
Bailey. We got caught up nigh Newfoundland, an’ 
didn’t have hardly any coal or wood on board. One 
man froze his foot an’ another his ears, an’ I come 
close to losin’ my nose. No, sir! no cold weather 
fer me! ” 

“ Then you don’t want to go and find the North 
Pole,” was Steve Colton’s comment, and he gave a 
laugh. 

“ No, I don’t. The North Pole has took care o' 
itself fer thousands o’ years, an’ it can continue to 
do so, fer all o’ Luke Striker ! ” 

Nearly a week passed after leaving Port Arthur 
before Larry came in personal contact with Kino 
Nana. The Japanese had scowled several times at 
the youth, but that was all. 


53 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The two were at work in the gunners’ quarters 
when Kino Nana came along and gave Larry’s ditty- 
box a kick that scattered the contents in several 
directions. 

“ Hold on! What are you doing there? ” called 
out the young sailor sharply. 

“What I do?” demanded the young Japanese. 
“ What you do? You set the box so I can trip over 
him, eh? ” 

“ The box wasn’t in your way at all. After this I 
want you to leave my things alone.” 

“Don’t you talk to me!” growled Kino Nana. 
“ I know what I do — you no can tell me, no. You 
only an American boy, bah ! ” And he made a 
face at Larry. 

“ See here, you had better keep a civil tongue in 
your head, Kino Nana,” answered Larry, warming 
up. “ Steve Colton has told me all about you. I 
won’t stand any nonsense. If you don’t keep your 
distance, you’ll find yourself in trouble.” 

“Tit, tit!” hissed the Japanese youth. “You 
talk big, you got one big head, like all Americans! 
You can no scare me. I know ! ” And then he 
muttered something in his own language, under his 
breath. 

“ I can’t understand your monkey talk,” con- 
tinued Larry. “ Talk United States, if you want 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 


59 


me to answer you.” And then he turned around to 
continue his work. Kino Nana went on speaking 
in Japanese, and presently shuffled on, his eyes full 
of hatred. 

“ I heard you had a row with that wart-nosed 
Jap,” said Luke, coming down a little later. 

“ Yes, and I told him to mind his own busi- 
ness,” answered Larry, and then he related what 
had occurred. 

“ Keep your eyes peeled, lad,” was the warning 
of the old Yankee tar. 

Two days more passed and the incident was slip- 
ping from Larry’s mind when, on coming below, 
just previous to inspection, he found his hammock 
and his clothing and shoes scattered in every direc- 
tion. More than this, some of his things were wet 
and dirty. 

“ This must be that Jap’s work,” he muttered to 
himself. 

As soon as he could, he put the articles in their 
proper places and cleaned up as best he could. But 
the sharp eyes of the inspection officer caught him 
and he received a severe rebuke. 

“ I am surprised to see your things in such a con- 
dition, Russell,” said the officer. 

“ I had them in shipshape, sir, but somebody 
played a trick on me,” answered Larry. 


6o 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Then see to it that no more such tricks are 
played, or I’ll have to punish you.” 

The inspection was scarcely over, and Larry had 
gone to work to clean some dirt from a flannel 
shirt in his roll when he caught sight of Kino Nana 
grinning at him wickedly from behind a partition. 

“ Come here ! ” he called out sharply, and drop- 
ping the garment he was holding, he made a dash 
for the Japanese and caught him by the arm. 

“You no hold me — you let me go!” stormed 
Kino Nana. “Let me go, or I strike!” And he 
raised his fist. 

“You mussed up my things!” answered Larry. 
“ What did you do it for? ” 

“Let go!” stormed the Japanese, and now he 
shoved his fist under Larry’s chin, pushing the 
young tar’s face upward. 

It was more than Larry could bear, and without 
stopping to think twice, he hauled off and struck 
Kino Nana a stinging blow in the chest which sent 
the Japanese back against a partition. 

“ Now let that be a warning to you,” he said 
hotly. “ You have got to keep your distance, or I’ll 
give you the worst thrashing you ever had in your 
life!” 

Full of rage and hate, the Japanese recovered 
from the blow Larry had dealt him, and in a twin- 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 


6l 


kling leaped at the young American. During his 
spare time he had taken lessons in Jiu Jitsu, the 
Japanese art of getting the better of an opponent 
in wrestling or in an ordinary hand-to-hand en- 
counter. He thought he could catch Larry un- 
awares, and floor him completely. 

But he was sadly mistaken. The young Ameri- 
ican tar was on his guard and not to be caught by 
any Japanese trick. He slipped away from the hold 
Kino Nana wished to obtain on him and making a 
pass with his left hand, delivered his right fist on the 
wart that adorned the Japanese’s nose, causing the 
owner to give a sudden howl of pain. 

By this time those near-by noted that something 
unusual was occurring and in a few moments a 
crowd began to collect, including two Americans 
who had but lately joined the ship. 

“ What’s the trouble ? ” asked one of the Amer- 
icans. 

“ A fight ! A fight ! ” shouted several of the 
Japanese. 

“ Give the American a sound whipping ! ” called 
out one of the crowd in Japanese. 

“ That’s right, we don’t want them on board of 
this ship!” said another, who had been intimate 
with Kino Nana. 

“ They are all right, Samsula,” came from an- 


62 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


other. “ You give the American fair play. He 
did his full share of fighting when we met the Rus- 
sians — give him due respect for that.” 

“ We’re going to have fair play,” put in the second 
American who had come up, and he added to his 
companion : “ Call Striker, Colton, and the rest.” 

While this talk was going on Kino Nana had at- 
tacked Larry again and this time succeeded in get- 
ting the young sailor’s wrist in his grip and giving 
it a painful turn. But Larry realized his danger, 
and as quickly as he could he landed a blow in the 
Japanese’s left eye and then caught him by the ear. 

“ Ough! Let go! ” screamed the youth with the 
wart on his nose. “ Let me go, you — you dog! ” 

“ Drop your hold and I’ll drop mine,” answered 
Larry, and gave the ear another twist. 

The pain was too great for Kino Nana and he 
dropped his hold and fell back several ^aces. Larry 
followed him up. 

“ I don’t know much about your Jiu Jitsu tricks,” 
said the young American. “ But if you want to 
fight fair, come on. I am not afraid of you.” 

To this Kino Nana did not answer. He was 
watching for an opening, and thinking he saw it, he 
rushed in and caught Larry’s left arm in both of his 
hands and began to double the member “ around the 
elbow ” as it is termed. It was a clever catch, and 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 63 

for the moment it looked as if the young tar would 
be forced to submission then and there. 

But Larry was “ game.” He had been in many a 
situation of peril before and his wits did not desert 
him. As his opponent would not fight fair, he did 
not see the necessity of doing so on his own part, 
and raising his foot, he gave Kino Nana a quick 
prod in the stomach that took the Japanese clear 
off his feet. Then Kino Nana staggered and 
fell flat on his back, and Larry came down on him 
heavily. 

The flooring upon which the contest occurred was 
of iron, and, Kino Nana’s head coming into contact 
with this, the Japanese was for the moment stunned. 
His hold on Larry was broken, and the young 
American lost no time in assuming a sitting position 
on top of his foe. 

“ Have you had enough ? ” he asked, when he saw 
Kino Nana blink his eyes and stare at him. “ Be- 
cause if you haven’t, I’m willing to give you more, 
right here and now.” 

“ Get — get away — leave me alone ! ” gasped the 
Japanese youth. “ I want to stand up ! ” 

“ You are not going to stand up just yet.” 

The Japanese began to struggle, but Larry was 
on the alert and kept on holding him down. Then 
the sailor called Samsula pushed his way forward. 


6 4 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Let him stand up,” he said, in his native tongue, 
and caught hold of Larry’s shoulder. 

“ Keep your oar out of this ! ” exclaimed Larry. 
“ I know what I am doing.” There was a danger- 
ous look in his eyes as he spoke. 

‘ What’s the row here! ” came from Luke Striker, 
and he pressed through the circle of onlookers. 
“ Larry ! ” 

“ It’s all right, Luke, only make the others keep 
back. I can manage him.” 

“ Go on back! ” called out the old Yankee tar and 
pushed Samsula out of the way. “ I reckon as how 
this ain’t none o’ your fry ! ” 

Samsula did not understand the words, but the 
menacing action was plain enough, and he retired, 
grumbling, to himself. Then Colton arrived, and 
all of the Americans made it plain that Larry 
and Kino Nana must be allowed to have it out 
between them. To this the majority of the 
Japanese acquiesced readily, for they liked 
Larry and knew Kino Nana to be a quarrelsome 
individual. 

“I say, have you had enough? ” demanded Larry, 
as he shook his clinched fist in the face of Kino 
Nana. 

“ I no fight more,” stammered the defeated one. 
“ Let me go ! ” 


A PERSONAL ENCOUNTER 


65 


Before Larry could reply to this came a shout 
from the upper deck which drew the attention of 
everybody. 

“ A warship in sight ! She looks like a Russian, 
and if she is there’s a fight ahead ! ” 


CHAPTER VIII 


SOMETHING OF A NAVAL BATTLE 

The bare possibility of another great battle on 
the ocean interested all on board of the Shohirika, 
and for the time being the outsiders forgot about the 
contest between Larry and his Japanese opponent. 
The sailors rushed off, anxious to learn more con- 
cerning the ship which had come into sight. 

The interruption suited Kino Nana, and as Larry 
arose he too lost no time in scrambling to his feet. 

“ I fight you other time,” said he, and ran off be- 
fore Larry could answer him. 

“ I’ll be ready ! ” called out the young sailor. 
“ Remember, I am not afraid of you ! ” 

“ Are you hurt, lad ? ” questioned Luke, who had 
remained. 

“ Not very much. He gave my arm a pretty bad 
twist. He wanted to get me at his mercy with some 
of his Jiu Jitsu tricks, but I didn’t give him the 
chance.” 

“ He’s as bad as Colton painted him,” said the old 
66 


SOMETHING OF A NAVAL BATTLE 67 

Yankee sailor. “ Keep your eyes peeled or he’ll 
surely play you foul.” 

A shout had come from the deck, and the friends 
hastened to a point where they might see what was 
going on. At a great distance a warship had been 
sighted by the watchers in the tops. Now the 
strange craft came slowly closer. 

“ Luke, are you wishing for a fight? ” questioned 
Larry curiously. 

“ I can’t say, exactly, lad. But I must allow as 
how I do love to fire our old Betsy Jane — an’ hit 
the target, too ! ” 

Several anxious minutes passed. There was 
something of a mist on the sea, but this was drifting 
away. Then came a shout : 

“ She’s one of our own ships ! ” 

The report was true, and some time later the two 
warships of the Mikado’s navy ranged up alongside 
of each other, and half a dozen signals were ex- 
changed. Then both vessels went on their way as 
before. 

“A false alarm,” said Larry, and drew a long 
breath. “ I don’t know but that I am just as well 
satisfied.” 

“ One thing is certain, it stopped thet fight be- 
tween you an’ the feller with the wart on his nose,” 
was Luke’s comment. 


68 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


For the remainder of that day and for some time 
afterwards Kino Nana kept his distance. When- 
ever he had to pass Larry he did so in silence, 
scowling darkly. That he was plotting mischief 
against the young American there could be no doubt. 

The captain of the Shohirika had been given 
orders to watch out for a small Russian warship 
named the Naze. It was supposed that the Naze 
had escaped from the vicinity of Port Arthur dur- 
ing the bombardment, but such was not a fact, as 
the vessel had broken down during the trip along 
the Manchurian coast, and was now many miles to 
the southward. 

On the Monday following the incident just re- 
corded there was a heavy mist on the sea and the 
Shohirika had to proceed with caution. She was 
moving under half-steam, and extra lookouts were 
stationed in the tops and at the bow, when as if by 
magic the mist rolled away revealing another war- 
ship not over half a mile away. 

“ A warship ! A warship ! ” was the cry, which 
ran through the vessel with almost electrical speed. 

“ What kind of a ship? ” 

“ A Russian vessel ! ” 

The last report proved to be true, and at once 
came the command to clear the ship for action. The 
gun crews were ordered to their stations, the maga- 


SOMETHING OF A NAVAL BATTLE 


69 


zines opened, shells passed up, and in scarcely any 
time at all the battery of eight-inch guns poured 
out their deadly fire. 

The Naze had been taken unawares, but returned 
the fire gallantly, a shell passing across the middle 
deck of the Shohirika , carrying away not a little 
wood and iron work and injuring several men. 
The Russian ship had been hit near the bow. 

“ She can’t stand against us — she isn’t big 
enough,” said Luke, as he worked over his gun, 
while Larry did the same. The piece had been dis- 
charged twice and now came orders for another 
shot. In went the shell, the piece was closed and 
“locked” and electrical connection set, the range- 
finders announced the distance, and watching hi* 
opportunity, Luke pressed the button. ang ! came 
the discharge, with a noise that was deafening, and 
the steel messenger of death .cried itsplf forth, to 
hit the Russian ship close t a stem* but two feet 
above the water line. 

“That wasn’t bad,” as the gun was 



smoke pouring 


opened and swabbed 


forth as from a smoKf ark, 

“No, but it should nave been below the water 
line,” grumbled the Yankee gunner. “ Then I 
reckon it would give em something to think about.” 
The battle kept , for fully a quarter of an hour. 


?o 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The Russians, realizing that their warship was no 
match for that of Admiral Togo’s fleet, did their 
best to retreat, and the Shohirika followed her up. 
The course of the Naze was towards the bank of 
mist, and just as orders came to fire another round 
at the enemy the Russian vessel disappeared from 
view. 

“ She has gone ! ” 

“ Can’t we overtake her, even in the fog? ” 

Such was one of the questions asked, and orders 
were given to put on all steam while the Shohirika 
was headed directly for the spot where the Naze had 
last been seen. But the mist was now growing 
thicker, and in less than half an hour it became 
certain that the Russian ship had made good her 
escape, at least for the time being. 

“ That ends that fight,” remarked Larry, as he 
noticed the engines slacking down. “ The fog has 
proved their best friend.” 

“ Well, we gave ’em something to remember us 
by,” answered Luke dryly. 

Although brief, the fight had been a warm one, 
and Larry was bathed in perspiration and covered 
with grime from the discharge of the big gun. As 
soon as the piece was cleaned, he got a bucket of 
water and washed up, and his old friend did the 
same. 


SOMETHING OF A NAVAL BATTLE 7 1 

For the whole of the next day an eager watch was 
kept for the reappearance of the Naze. But the 
Russians had taken time by the forelock and left 
the vicinity and so nothing came of the Japanese 
vigilance. 

The weather continued misty and occasionally 
they ran into banks of fog so thick that the lookouts 
could not see fifty feet ahead of the ship. The 
Shohirika was known to be in the vicinity of several 
rocky islands and when the bad weather continued 
the commander ordered a change of course, so that 
there might be less danger of running on the rocks. 

“ I must say, I don’t i: ke this weather at all,” said 
Larry, when they had been sailing through the thick 
fog for two days. “ I’d give a day’s pay for a bit 
of sunshine. The fog makes the ship an awfully 
dismal place.” 

That evening, just as the jackies were about to 
retire, came a strange thump at the stern, followed 
by a grinding and tearing sound. Then bells were 
rung hurriedly, and the engines of the warship came 
to a stop. 

It was some time before the men could learn what 
had occurred, but presently an under officer let drop 
the information that the Shohirika had run into a 
mass of wreckage of some sort and this mass had 
become entangled in the screw and steering-gear and 


7 2 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


injured both. There was no telling how long it 
would take to repair the injury done. 

“ This is worse than ever,” was old Luke’s com- 
ment. “Now I reckon we’ve got to drift around 
in this fog.” 

“ Well, drifting when you don’t know where you 
are drifting to is mighty dangerous,” returned 
Larry. “ They’ll have to keep a stricter lookout 
than ever.” 

As if to assist them, the fog lifted a little that af- 
ternoon and soon a steady breeze blew up. But the 
breeze kept increasing in volume, until it was blow- 
ing half a gale, causing the warship to roll greatly 
from side to side. 

“ Now we are in for a storm,” asserted Steve Col- 
ton, and he was right. Rain fell early in the even- 
ing, and then came instant flashes of lightning and 
low mutterings of thunder. The rain and wind 
kept on increasing, until the water was falling in 
“ sheets,” and the fierce gusts of air shrieked and 
tore through the rigging and fighting tops. 

“ This is a regular old-timer,” said Larry, as he 
gazed out on the fury of the elements. “ This would 
be a stiff one for the old Columbia to weather; eh, 
Luke?” 

“ Well, it’s bad enough for this ship, Larry, with 
our screw and steerin’ gear out o’ order.” 


SOMETHING OF A NAVAL BATTLE 73 

“ Oh, I notice they are keeping her up to the wind 
pretty well. ,, 

“ Not as much as is good fer her, lad. Remem- 
ber, we ain’t on no ship built o’ wood, but on one 
built o’ iron an’ steel. Give them waves a chance 
an’ they’d send us down to Davy Jones’s locker so 
quick you wouldn’t have time to think on it ! ” 

“ Why, you don’t think we are going to sink, do 
you? ” 

“ She ain’t goin’ to sink so long as she minds her 
helm — thet is, unless this ’ere storm gits worsen” 

Fortunately the rain and wind were fairly warm 
— quite in contrast to the cold they had previously 
experienced. Feeling something of the general 
nervousness, only a few of the jackies went to sleep, 
the others either resting in their hammocks or sit- 
ting around, talking in low tones. A few were 
frightened and among them Kino Nana, who ran 
around from one friend to another asking what each 
thought of the situation. 

“ I believe that feller is a coward at heart,” said 
Luke, after listening to the Japanese’s chatter. 

“ Sure he is,” answered Colton. “ If he wasn’t, 
he wouldn’t be such a sneak. He tackled Larry be- 
cause he thought he could floor the lad with his Jiu 
Jitsu tricks.” 

It was about three o’clock in the morning, and 


74 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Larry had just fallen into a light doze, when a 
thumping of the warship aroused him. The first 
thump was followed by a second and a third, and 
then the vessel heeled over to port in such a fashion 
that he was sent sprawling on the floor. 

“ What’s the matter now? ” he cried, as he tried 
to pick himself up. 

“ We’ve struck something,” replied Luke, who 
was also on the floor trying to steady himself. 
“ There she goes ag’in ! ” 

His words were swallowed up in a grinding crash 
that came from underneath the warship. The 
Shohirika seemed to be lifted up fully ten feet and 
then to drop back with a quiver that shook her from 
stem to stern. 

“We must be on the rocks! ” gasped Larry, and 
now his face turned pale. 

“ You are right, lad,” answered Luke. “ An’ 
more’n likely we’ve got a big hole stove in the 
bottom ! ” 


CHAPTER IX 


THE WRECKING OF THE WARSHIP 

“ We are sinking! We are sinking! ” 

Such was the cry that was raised throughout the 
decks of the Shohirika. The cry was in Japanese, 
but our friends understood the words only too well, 
and the face of each blanched. 

Men were hurrying in all directions, and in the 
midst of the confusion came another crash and again 
the warship was lifted up, to sink a moment later 
and keel over on her side. 

The situation was a trying one, but, to their credit 
be it said, the officers remained calm and did what 
they could to quiet the men under them. But the 
fury of the elements, combined with the continued 
crashing, as the ship pounded on the rocks, was 
enough to turn the stoutest heart, and the jackies 
could not be controlled. Many rushed to the upper 
deck, and several, in their fear of going down with 
the warship, flung themselves overboard. 

It must be admitted that Larry and Luke knew 
not what to do. As members of a gun crew their 


75 


;6 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


duty did not require them to go below, to see what 
damage had been done, nor were they required on 
the deck. 

“ What are you going to do? ” queried Larry. 

“ Stay right here jest now,” answered the Yankee 
gunner. “ It may not be as bad as we imagine.” 

They waited, one, two, three minutes. Only a 
handful of men were around them, the others hav- 
ing scrambled up the iron ladders to the upper deck. 
The door above had been left open, and the rain was 
coming down in a flood. 

A hoarse whistle sounded out — a signal of dis- 
tress, but no answer came back. The warship was 
still pounding out her very life on the rocks. The 
steering-gear was now utterly useless and the feeble 
turns of the screw proved of no practical value. 

Presently came a crash of glass, and through the 
port-holes rushed a flood of sea water, almost taking 
Larry from his feet. He turned and clutched his 
old friend by the arm. 

“ We can’t stand this, we’ll have to go on deck! ” 

“ Right ye are, Larry ! ” And catching at what- 
ever came to hand to steady them, they mounted the 
ladder and crawled out on the wet and treacherous 
deck, filled with sailors moving to and fro, not 
knowing what to do. 

“ Oh, this is awful, awful ! ” they heard Kino 


THE WRECKING OF THE WARSHIP 77 

Nana cry. “Somebody save us!” And then he 
went off into a splutter of Japanese that nobody 
could understand. 

Darkness was on every side, but now a search- 
light was brought into play, and from its powerful 
light those on the Shohirika made out a distant coast 
of rocks, low lying and desolate. Between the 
shore and the ship were other rocks over which the 
sea was churning and foaming. 

Could those on the ship reach that coast, frowning 
and fearful but still far better than a grave in the 
ocean under them? The matter was considered 
with care and finally several of the small boats were 
launched and also a life-raft of considerable propor- 
tions. 

“ That’s taking a big risk,” said Larry, as he 
watched the proceedings. 

“ Yes, but we’re taking a big risk by remaining 
here,” put in Colton. 

“ If we slide off into deep water we’ll most likely 
go to the bottom,” said an American named Bob 
Stanford, who had enlisted at the time Colton 
joined the Japanese navy. “ I’d rather be on that 
rocky shore any time.” 

One trip was made successfully and then the 
small boats came back for another load. A small 
line had been carried to the shore and to this the 


78 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


life-raft was attached, the small rope giving place to 
one much larger in size. The raft was crowded with 
sailors, and Luke and Larry were told that they 
could go too if they wished. 

“ Might as well try it,” said the old Yankee gun- 
ner, and they slipped down the rope ladder and on 
to the raft. Each man had a life preserver around 
him and all held on with deathlike grimness, realiz- 
ing fully the gravity of the situation. 

Larry’s heart seemed to stand still when he felt 
himself where the raging sea could wash over his 
feet. There were ropes across the top of the life 
raft and to these the sailors clung, realizing that if 
they were swept overboard they would surely be 
drowned. The raft was crowded. 

“ Give me room ! ” cried a voice at Larry’s elbow, 
and Kino Nana shoved in beside the young 
American and tried to force him from his position. 

“ Be careful, you ! ” cried Larry warningly. 
“ I’ll stand no nonsense ! ” And he spoke so 
sternly that the Japanese realized that he had a 
desperate youth to deal with, and one who was 
going to take no risks that were not necessary. The 
fellow shrank back and gave Larry the room he 
needed. 

“ Are ye all right, Larry ? ” came in a loud 
voice from Luke. He was forced to raise his 


THE WRECKING OF THE WARSHIP 79 

tones to make himself heard above the raging of 
the storm. 

“Yes!” screamed the young sailor. “Hold 
tight! We’re leaving the ship! ” 

He was right, and an instant later the Sho- 
hirika faded from view and they were left in the 
darkness amid the raging sea, which swept the top 
of the raft at every wave. But then the searchlight 
of the wrecked vessel was turned upon them and 
upon those who were handling the rope from the 
shore end. 

It was a trip Larry never forgot, and before it 
came to a conclusion the young American thought 
they would surely go to the bottom of the sea. 
Twice the raft bumped on the half-hidden rocks, 
once with such violence that one end was ripped 
apart and two sailors hurled overboard. Even Luke 
came close to rolling off, only Larry clutched him 
in the nick of time and brought him back. 

“ Hold fast, Luke!” 

“ Thet’s wot I was a-tryin’ to do ! ” gasped the 
old Yankee tar. “We hit hard thet time, didn’t 
we?” 

Slowly but surely the raft drew closer to the 
shore, until at last there came a final thump and all 
hands were told to scramble for their lives. 
This they did, clinging to the rocks like half- 


8o 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


drowned monkeys, and fighting their way upward, 
to where the waves and flying spray could not 
reach them. 

Larry and Luke left the raft side by side, each 
keeping an eye on the other. Once it looked as if 
the young sailor would have to fall back from sheer 
want of strength, but the old Yankee’s strong arm 
supported him. It was largely a case of each man 
for himself, and when they got to firm ground they 
were apart from their fellows. 

“ Oh ! ” gasped Larry, and sank down, for his legs 
trembled so that he could not stand. 

“Hurt?” asked Luke, he could scarcely say 
more. 

“ N — no — but my — my wind is gone! ” 

“ Thank heaven we are on shore, lad ! ” 

For a moment after that there was silence. Al- 
ready the raft was on its way back to the warship, 
to be used by others aboard the craft. 

As the raft sank back into the rolling sea, Larry 
heard a cry of anguish. The rope, slipping over the 
rocks, had brushed against Kino Nana, sending him 
tumbling back into the water. A moment later he 
reappeared, clutching at some rocks further down. 
He could get his head and shoulders out of the sea, 
but that was all. 

“ He’ll be drowned! ” cried Larry hoarsely. 



The searchlight of the wrecked vessel was turned upon 
them. — Page 79. 
















'A ' 


♦ 





V " f : 













































THE WRECKING OF THE WARSHIP 8 1 

“ He should have gotten out of the way o’ the 
rope,” said Luke. 

“ Oh, can’t we save him ? ” The thought of 
having the Japanese drowned before his eyes was a 
terrible one to the youth. 

“ Don’t try it — it’s too much of a risk ! ” called 
out Colton, who stood near, dashing the rain from 
his face. 

But Larry paid no attention. Running forward, 
he let himself down on the rocks and then lay flat 
out and put down a hand. 

“ Catch hold ! ” he cried. “ Catch hold ! I will 
pull you up ! ” 

Kino Nana heard the cry and looked up. The 
searchlight from the ship fell upon Larry and he 
saw the outstretched hand. He raised up and 
caught hold. At the same moment Luke came 
down and caught Larry by the feet. 

There was a strong pull by all, and up on the 
rocks came Kino Nana, spluttering and gasping and 
so exhausted that he could not stand. He sank to 
the ground, but clutched at Larry’s knees. 

“ Good ! ” he mumbled. “ Good you ! ” And 
then he fainted, and had to be carried still further 
back. 

Half a dozen had been exhausted and of these 
four lay motionless. One was an American and 


82 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


over this man the other Americans worked, rolling 
him and holding, him up by the heels until the water 
ran from his mouth. It was a good half-hour be- 
fore the man revived and then he was deathly weak. 

Morning was at hand before the last of those on 
the warship reached the shore. The vessel had 
now sunk so low among the rocks that the waves 
washed part of her forward deck. There was a big 
hole in her bottom through which the water had 
come, flooding three compartments of the hold. 

It was still pouring in torrents and the barren 
shore upon which the survivors from the warship 
had landed afforded no shelter whatever. While 
some remained behind to care for those who had 
suffered others went on an exploring tour. Order 
was restored as far as possible, but the officers 
were as much in doubt over what to do next as were 
the men. Where they had landed was a question, 
since the Shohirika had drifted many miles after 
damaging her screw and her steering-gear. 

At eight o’clock the exploring party came back 
and reported that the coast belonged to a rocky 
island not over half a mile wide by twice that in 
length. There were only a few trees in the middle 
of the island, and not a sign of a habitation. They 
could not make out how far the island was from the 
mainland. 


THE WRECKING OF THE WARSHIP 


»3 


“ Here is a fresh pickle for us ,” said Larry, when 
this news was circulated. “ How are we ever to 
get away from here? We can’t all get in the small 
boats or on the raft.” 

“ Don’t think of getting away afore this storm 
clears,” answered Luke. 

“ We’ll want something to eat and to drink, too,” 
came from Bob Stanford. 

“ Oh, we can get things from the ship — if she 
outlasts the storm,” returned Colton. 

Night found the storm raging as violently as 
ever. The warship had now been totally aban- 
doned, for she was settling deeper and deeper 
among the rocks. Only some water and a few kegs 
of biscuits had been brought ashore, and these were 
dealt out sparingly. 

“ We’ll have to get something soon, or we’ll 
starve to death here,” was old Luke’s comment. 

The night to follow was a trying one, especially 
to those who had been injured or who had come 
close to being drowned. Such a thing as comfort 
was out of the question, and Larry and his friends 
huddled together under a tree, making the best of 
the situation. 

“ Hurrah ! sunlight at last ! ” cried the young 
sailor, in the morning, and he was right. The 
storm had broken away an hour before and now the 


8 4 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


sun came up, round and clear, changing the whole 
face of nature as if by magic. The sea still ran 
high, sending the surf pounding on the rocks as 
before. 

Those on the island looked around eagerly, and 
then one face after another fell. As far as the eye 
or spyglass could reach the wide sea rolled around 
the place, and not a single sail, friendly or otherwise, 
was in sight ! 


CHAPTER X 


BEN AND GILBERT ON THE MARCH 

It is now time that we return to Gilbert and Ben 
and ascertain how matters fared with the two young 
soldiers after the departure of Larry on his ill-fated 
ship. 

From Major Okopa they learned that the special 
command to which they were attached would not 
leave for the front for three days and this time they 
spent in doing what they could for Grace Chase. 
The old man who had worked for the Richmond 
Importing Company was installed in the Chase 
house to afford the young lady protection, and upon 
Grace’s special request the two young Americans 
took temporary charge of business matters at the 
offices, after which they had a Japanese guard 
stationed there day and night. 

From Nathan Chase’s papers they learned that he 
had had several business transactions of importance 
with Olaf Pallak. On some of these transactions 
the Anglo-Chinese Company had made money, but 
on others it had lost heavily. There was also a 
85 


86 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


demand from Pallak that the merchant pay him five 
thousand rubles as a commission on a certain deal. 
This commission had been refused, and Olaf Pallak 
had written a letter in return, stating that Nathan 
Chase would one day be bitterly sorry for what he 
had done. 

“ One thing is certainly clear/’ remarked Gilbert, 
when the examination of the papers was complete. 
“ Olaf Pallak hates Mr. Chase and would do all he 
could to bring the merchant to grief.” 

“ Do you think Mr. Chase is dead, Gilbert? ” 

“ I’m not prepared to say that, Ben. Some of 
these Russians would do almost anything for 
money. Just remember how that rascal, Ivan 
Snokoff, treated me when I started to do business in 
Port Arthur.” 

“ I wonder where Snokoff is now? ” 

“ I don’t know and I don’t care — if only he will 
leave me alone in the future.” 

That evening the two young Americans paid 
Grace Chase a final visit and told her how they had 
left affairs at her father’s office. She thanked them 
heartily for their kindness, but it was plainly to be 
seen that the girl was much downcast and all the 
words of comfort they could utter failed to cheer 
her up. 

“ If father does not return I do not know what I 


BEN AND GILBERT ON THE MARCH 87 

shall do,” she said. “ I am almost alone in the 
world.” 

“ Well, we’ll do all we can for you,” said Ben 
gently, and Gilbert said the same. 

Bright and early the next day the two young cap- 
tains reported for duty at the headquarters of their 
command, which was stationed on the northern out- 
skirts of Port Arthur, at a point where the Russians 
had had one of their strongest outer fortifications. 
The place was now being used as a depot for ra- 
tions, and was full of bustle and excitement as 
wagons and carts came and went, bringing 
supplies and taking them away. Five thousand 
infantry were encamped round about, the tents 
being placed in the shelter of a cliff, where the 
strong north wind could not strike them. On all 
sides were huge bonfires at which the Japanese 
soldiers did their best to keep warm. 

“I am glad to see you back ! ” cried Major 
Okopa, as he shook hands with them. He had been 
educated at one of Japan’s best universities and 
spoke English fluently. “ I trust both of you are 
once again in condition to do some excellent fight- 
ing.” 

“ I’m willing to do my best,” answered Gilbert 
modestly. 

“ And so am I,” added Ben. 


88 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“No one can do more than that.” 

“ When do we move, Major? ” 

“ As soon as the order comes. Most likely this 
afternoon or to-morrow morning.” 

“ I suppose we are going northward,” came from 
Ben. 

“ That is the only place where it is likely we can 
be needed, Captain Russell. We have driven the 
Russians out of the whole of the Port Arthur dis- 
trict, and northward out of Liao Yang. I think 
that our army’s next great advance will be upon 
Mukden.” 

“ That’s a pretty strong Russian city just now,” 
said Gilbert. 

“ It is only strong because it is at present the base 
of supplies for Kuropatkin’s army.” 

“ And where is the Russian army at present? ” 

“ Along the Hun and the Sha Rivers, about mid- 
way between Liao Yang and Mukden. It has been 
so cold that fighting has been out of the question.” 

What Major Okopa said was true: and here it 
may be as well to take a look at how matters in 
general were standing between the soldiers of the 
Mikado and those of the Czar. 

After the great battle of Liao Yang, which has 
already been described in detail in “ Linder the 
Mikado’s Flag,” but little was done for weeks by 


BEN AND GILBERT ON THE MARCH 89 

both armies in the central portion of Manchuria. 
Several encounters took place directly north of the 
fallen city, but then winter came on and snow and 
ice drove the brave soldiers of both sides into quar- 
ters. Many had little or no shelter and the suffer- 
ing in some cases was great. “ Pot firing ” kept up 
constantly, and those on or near the firing line had 
to keep out of sight for fear of being picked off. 

Thousands of troops, including the special com- 
mand to which Ben and Gilbert were attached, were 
ordered from the Japanese front and sent south- 
ward, to assist at the assault on Port Arthur. This 
weakened the Mikado’s force confronting Kuropat- 
kin, but the Russian general was just then in no 
position to take advantage of the situation, having 
lost so many men and having failed to receive the 
reenforcements promised to him. 

The Japanese commander realized that, having 
suffered such a defeat at Liao Yang, the Russians 
would undoubtedly be more cautious than ever in 
their future military movements. Accordingly a 
plan was secretly laid to draw Kuropatkin into a 
trap, if possible. 

The plan itself was simple, yet the carrying out of 
it was a tremendous undertaking. The forces of 
the Czar were divided into three armies: General 
Kaulbars’s force being in the west, close to the Hun 


90 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


River ; General Bilderling in the center, north of the 
Sha River ; and General Linevitch in the east, among 
the hills. 

The Japanese authorities allowed it to become 
known that a powerful army was marching up in 
the east, with the intention of turning the left 
flank of the Russian forces, and some troops were 
really sent in that direction and several skirmishes 
of importance occurred. 

But while this was going on, a vast number of 
soldiers under General Nogi were concentrating in 
the far west. This army contained probably a hun- 
dred thousand men, and was hidden from view in 
front by some cavalry and artillery. The plan was 
to draw the attention of the Russians to their left 
flank, and while they were fighting in that direction 
to hurry the army under Nogi forward in a vast 
semicircle and turn the enemy’s right. How 
General Kuropatkin and his generals fell into this 
trap and what the outcome was, we shall see later. 

The men of both Gilbert’s company and of Ben’s 
were glad to see the young commanders back, and 
there were numerous handshakings when they 
walked into camp. Many of the soldiers were from 
the universities and technical schools of Japan, and 
at the outbreak of the war had enlisted in the 
Mikado’s service out of pure patriotism. They 


BEN AND GILBERT ON THE MARCH 91 

were of a better class than the regularly enlisted 
men, and quite a number of them could speak 
English and French. 

“ Proud to see you looking so well, Captain Pen- 
nington, ” said the lieutenant who had had charge of 
Gilbert’s command. “ Your brief vacation has 
done you good.” 

“ It was exciting enough to do anybody good,” 
answered the young Southerner, with a smile. 

“We have a long tramp before us, so I under- 
stand.” 

“ More than likely. Well, it will be a little 
change. I must confess, when I am in the army I 
hate to stay in camp, doing nothing.” 

The order to break camp came early on the fol- 
lowing morning and by ten o’clock a detachment of 
one of the divisions, three thousand strong, was on 
the march. Major Okopa’s command was at the 
head of the column, with a troop of cavalry acting 
as a vedette guard. 

“ I wonder how far we are going to march?” 
ventured Ben, when he had a chance to speak to his 
superior. 

“About a hundred' and fifty to two hundred miles, 
Captain Russell.” 

“ Really, Major! That’s a pretty stiff journey in 
this freezing weather.” 


92 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ We are not to hurry ourselves, so I’ve been told. 
Ten to fifteen miles a day will be all that they’ll de- 
mand of the column.” 

“ Are there any troops ahead of us ? ” 

“ Yes, a large column and another column to 
come directly behind.” 

“ Our Field Marshal is evidently going to start 
the campaign early? ” 

“ Oyama knows what he is doing,” responded the 
Japanese major, with a bland smile. “ If we get to 
the front before the thaw comes, we can cross all the 
rivers with little difficulty.” 

“ That is true.” 

“ More than that, with the frost still in the 
ground it will be next to impossible for the Russians 
to throw up intrenchments — if we press them too 
hard.” 

“ True again. But what if they press us and we 
want to throw up intrenchments? ” 

The Japanese officer blew a stream of air through 
his pursed-up lips. 

“ You don’t believe that possible? ” 

“ Does it look so — after what has happened, Cap- 
tain Russell? We have beaten them many 
times — we’ll beat them again,” added the Japanese 
officer. 

“ You mustn’t be too confident, Major Okopa. 


BEN AND GILBERT ON THE MARCH 93 

Some day the Russians may give us a tremendous 
defeat.” 

“ Do you really think so? ” 

“ No, I don’t think so — but it may happen, 
nevertheless. You’ll admit they know how to fight 
well.” 

“ Yes, since I have tasted the quality of their 
weapons. I do not think that they fight with such 
vigor as our men possess, but they are stubborn.” 

It was bitterly cold and Ben was glad enough to 
button his army coat tightly around him. The 
column kept on the march until five in the afternoon 
and then came to a halt at the village of Kli-Pam, 
which had been badly wrecked during the advance 
upon Port Arthur. Here Major Okopa’s command 
found shelter in an old warehouse, and a score of 
fires were started to keep the men warm and for 
cooking purposes. 

“ We are going to have some snow,” said Gilbert, 
while they were eating a rather plain supper and 
washing it down with some tea — something every 
Japanese soldier insists upon having, no matter 
where he may happen to be. “ The air is full of 
it.” 

The snow began to come down a little later and 
before midnight it was several inches deep. So far 
there had been but little wind, but now it com- 


94 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


menced to blow until it piped merrily through the 
broken-out windows of the old warehouse. 

“I don’t like this,” remarked Gilbert. “ I fancied 
we were going to have a pretty fair shelter here, but 
the building leaks like a sieve.” 

It was some time before the young Southerner 
and Ben could get to sleep. Then, less than half an 
hour later, they were awakened by somebody shak- 
ing them roughly. 

“ Get up, Captain Pennington ! Get up, Captain 
Russell ! ” came from one of the soldiers who could 
speak English. “ The warehouse is rocking, and 
Major Okopa thinks it is going to fall ! ” 


CHAPTER XI 


A CLEW AND A PLAN 

“What's that? the warehouse coming down?” 
cried Ben, as he leaped to his feet. 

“ Yes, captain.” 

“ Then we’ll have to get out by all means. 
Arouse all of our men.” 

“ This is the worst yet,” muttered Gilbert, who 
had also arisen. “ The major is right,” he went 
on, as he glanced around the dilapidated structure. 
“Just see the thing shake! ” 

By this time the alarm was general and officers 
and privates were leaving the old warehouse as 
rapidly as possible, some rushing to the doors while 
others jumped through the broken-out windows. 
Side by side Ben and Gilbert ran towards a rear 
door, only to find it so jammed that it could not be 
moved. 

“We can’t get out this way!” cried the young 
Southerner, turning back. 

“ Here’s a window. That’s good enough for 
me ! ” answered Ben, and cleared the sill at a bound, 


95 


96 UNDER TOGO TOR JAPAN 

followed by his chum. “ Have you all of your 
things ? ” 

“ Yes.” 

The wind was howling dismally and the top por- 
tion of the warehouse creaked loudly and rocked 
slowly to and fro. In two minutes all the men were 
out of the building. 

“All safe?” cried Major Okopa, peering in at 
one of the doors and then at a window. 

There was no answer from inside and soon it was 
ascertained that all the soldiers had gotten out in 
safety, taking their belongings with them. The 
structure continued to sway, but that was all. 

“ Don’t believe it is going to fall at all,” growled 
a second-lieutenant, in Japanese. “ We might as 
well have finished our sleep instead of coming out 
in this fierce storm.” 

“ You may return if you wish,” answered the 
major sharply. “ But it will be at your own risk.” 

“She’s going!” exclaimed Ben, a minute later, 
and with more loud creaking the top of the ware- 
house began slowly to settle towards the back, until 
the end of the roof was but ten feet from the 
ground. The back of the building buckled and 
cracked, sending boards and splinters in all direc- 
tions. Then the wreck stood as it was. 

“ We didn’t get out any too soon after all,” re- 


A CLEW AND A PLAN 


97 


marked Major Okopa, and looked significantly at 
the lieutenant who had grumbled over having his 
sleep disturbed. With a face full of shame the 
under-officer moved back into the crowd without re- 
plying. 

From the wreckage the soldiers gathered a good 
supply of wood and then proceeded to make them- 
selves as comfortable as possible around roaring 
campfires. The snow had stopped coming down, 
but the rising wind sent that which was on the 
ground whirling in all directions. 

“ This is one of the real comforts of army life,” 
said Ben dryly, as he brushed some snow from 
around his neck. “ Whoof ! but it’s cold ! ” 

“ You ought not to mind it, Ben,” answered Gil- 
bert. “You were brought up in northern New 
York State, where it’s pretty cold in winter. I was 
raised in the South, and this cuts me like a knife.” 

“ That’s true, but I didn’t used to sleep outdoors 
when I was at home.” 

“ By the way, you haven’t heard from home 
lately, have you ? ” 

“ No, but that last letter I got said that Uncle 
Job was well and that brother Walter was doing 
finely in business, so I am not worrying. I am go- 
ing to send long letters to both as soon as I can get 
the chance to write them,” went on Ben. 


9 8 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


By nine o’clock on the following morning the 
column was on the march again. Another column 
six thousand strong had come up and was on the 
left. The day was clear and the bright sunshine 
made the snow dazzling. 

The march was kept up all that week and also on 
the following Monday, and then the special com- 
mand under Major Okopa came to a halt at 
An-Saling, a small place but one of considerable 
importance on account of the trade with the sur- 
rounding district. In the meanwhile the weather 
moderated, so that the hardships of outdoor life 
were greatly lessened. 

At An-Saling Ben ran into two old sharpshooters 
who had seen service with him in Cuba and in the 
Philippines. These were Carl Stummer and Dan 
Casey, now attached to a command which had been 
doing excellent work in and around Liao Yang. 

“ Hurrah ! Dare vos Captain Russell vonce 
more!” ejaculated the German sharpshooter, rush- 
ing up and almost hugging Ben. “ Cabtain, you 
vos a sight for sore eyes, ain’t it ! ” And his honest 
face glowed with delight. 

“ How are you, Carl ? ” answered Ben, and shook 
hands. “ Just as well as ever? That’s good! ” 

“ Sure an’ it’s meself is glad to see ye both,” 
came from Dan Casey, his freckled, Irish face 


A CLEW AND A PLAN 


99 


breaking into a broad grin. He, too, shook hands. 
“ We can think a koind Providence we’re able to 
mate loike this wance more, eh ? ” 

“ You are right, Dan,” answered Gilbert soberly. 
“ Many a man has lost one or more friends in this 
struggle.” 

“ Tan says maype ve ton’t got shot because ve vos 
porn to be hung alretty ! ” put in Carl Stummer and 
laughed at his joke. “ Tan, he got hung last veek.” 

“ Got hung last week ? ” repeated Ben, in per- 
plexity. 

“ Dot’s it — und he didn’t like it for a cent 
neider ! ” continued the German sharpshooter. 

“ ’Twas Carl proved me best frind,” broke in Dan 
Casey. “ ’Twas this way : Both av us were in a 
tree, pickin’ off th’ Roossians whiniver they showed 
thimsilves. Ping! comes a bullet be me ear, an’ I 
dodged, an’ lost me footin’ and goes down among 
the branches an’ catches me neck with a jerk that 
nearly killed me. I was that winded an’ fast I 
couldn’t help meself, whin Carl jumps from the nixt 
tree, pulls me loose an’ saves me loife ! ” 

“ Good for you, Carl ! ” cried both Ben and 
Gilbert. 

“ Dot vos all right,” answered the German sharp- 
shooter calmly. “ Tan, he tone chust so much for 
me. I goes to sleep in der schnow und I sleep my- 


100 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


selluf to death, only he comes along und vakes me up 
und runs me aroundt der camp like ve vos vild 
Indians ! He vos dook care of me chust like I dook 
care of him all der dimes.” 

“Have you had much fighting lately?” asked 
Ben. 

“ Not enough to kape us in practice.” answered 
Dan Casey. “ It’s a first-class battle I’d like to be 
in this minit, so I would ! ” 

“ Never mind, you may get all the fighting you 
want later on,” said Gilbert. “ What brings you 
down here? ” 

“ Orders. I think we’ll be after escortin’ a 
powdher train to th’ westward soon — but I’m not 
certain. These Japanese know how to kape their 
mouths shut about their movements.” 

“ And that makes them successful,” said Ben. 
“ The Russians never know what to expect from 
them.” 

The two sharpshooters had a long story to tell of 
their various adventures and then listened to what 
Ben and Gilbert had to relate with interest. When 
they heard about the strange disappearance of 
Nathan Chase each shook his head. 

“ He vos tead most likely,” was Stummer’s com- 
ment. “ Dem schalavags of Roossians vos putty 
pad fellers, I told you ! ” 


A CLEW AND A PLAN 


IOI 


“ It’s too bad fer th’ young lady,” said Casey. 
“ An’ I suppose she’s young an’ pretty, too ; eh, 
Captain Russell? ” 

“ Perhaps you had better ask Gilbert about that,” 
responded Ben, and turned red in the face. 

“ She is both young and pretty,” replied the young 
Southerner. “ I think so, and I know Ben does too. 
We’d like to help her if we could. And, by the 
way,” he added, to his chum, “ Mr. Chase used to 
do some business in this town. Perhaps we can 
find out something about him here.” 

“ Then let us look around, by all means,” an- 
swered Ben. 

As soon as they could get away from their com- 
mands the two young Americans set off on their 
search. By inquiring of several Chinese merchants 
they soon located the building which the Anglo- 
Chinese Company had once used for an office. 
Here they ran across an Englishman who had trans- 
acted some business for the man who was missing. 

“ No, I haven’t seen him,” said John Penwick. 
“ And if he came to this town I think I would find 
it out. We are dreadfully upset. This bloody war 
is going to ruin everything.” 

“ Do you know anything about his accounts ? ” 

“ He sent a Russian up here some time ago to 
collect his bills for him.” 


102 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ A Russian ? ” cried Ben and Gilbert in a breath. 

“ Yes. Not a very pleasant fellow, either. But 
he made everybody toe the mark.” 

“ What sort of looking Russian ? ” asked Gilbert, 
and John Pen wick described the individual as best 
he could. 

“ It must have been Olaf Pallak,” said Ben. 

“ More than likely,” answered his chum. 

“ I wonder how much he collected? ” 

“ You might find out by going to certain parties,” 
answered the Englishman. “ I’ll take you around.” 

He was as good as his word, and two hours were 
spent among the merchants and others who' had 
done business with Nathan Chase and the company 
he represented. They learned that the strange Rus- 
sian had collected an amount equal to fifteen hun- 
dred dollars. He had told all whom he had met 
that Nathan Chase wanted the sums to be paid in 
cash instead of being paid in paper intrusted to the 
mails or otherwise. 

“ He was certainly slick,” was Ben’s comment. 

From one small merchant they learned that the 
strange Russian had been seen in the vicinity of An- 
Saling but two days before. He had been with 
several other suspicious-looking characters and a 
number of Chinese who were suspected of belonging 
to the Chunchuses, or Chinese brigands. 


A CLEW AND A PLAN 


103 


“ Where did he go ? ” questioned Gilbert. 

“ He took the road to the westward,” was the re- 
ply. “ It leads to the mountains and to an old 
abandoned mine.” 

“A mine?” came from Ben. “If that's so, 
these rascals may have a sort of rendezvous at the 
mine.” 

“ If I was sure of that, I’d try to organize a party 
to go after them and root them out.” 

“ Let us do it, Gilbert!” 

“ It might be dangerous work, Ben.” 

“ That’s true, but so is fighting at the front dan- 
gerous, and this particular Russian is worse than a 
whole company of ordinary soldiers. Perhaps we 
could take Carl and Dan along to help us.” 

The matter was talked over for half an hour, and 
then the two young captains submitted their plan to 
Major Okopa. He was willing to let them go, and 
allowed them to take along a detachment of ten 
men. Then they consulted with the two sharp- 
shooters. 

“ Sure an’ I’ll go!” cried Casey readily. “Just 
th’ bit av an adventure I loike ! ” 

“ I say der same,” added Carl Stummer. 

“ Then come on without delay,” said Gilbert ; and 
soon the party was on the way, never dreaming of 
the perils which lay ahead. 


CHAPTER XII 


THE ABANDONED MINE 

“ We must be careful,” said Ben, after the party 
had left the town. “ We don’t want to fall in with 
the Chunchuses if we can help it.” 

“ Right you are,” responded Gilbert. He had 
not forgotten his former experience with the Chi- 
nese brigands. “ It would be just like that Pallak 
and his tool Boschnoff to join such a band of ras- 
cals.” 

The way was along a country road and over a 
slight rise of ground. In the summer time the 
highway was lined with fields of millet, but now 
everything was covered with snow and ice. For- 
tunately, there was no wind, so that walking was 
fairly pleasant. 

Whenever they passed a Chinese house the resi- 
dents gazed at them curiously or fled from sight. 
Occasionally they would come to a building that was 
deserted or partly burned or else boarded up and 
abandoned. 


104 


THE ABANDONED MINE 


105 


“ This war has certainly cost the inhabitants of 
Manchuria and Korea dear,” said Ben, after they 
had passed a place that looked particularly desolate. 
“ It will take millions upon millions of dollars to 
cover the damage done.” 

“War is always costly, Ben, and it’s a good deal 
like a fire — what’s destroyed is destroyed and that is 
all there is to it, no matter who pays the bill.” 

After two hours of hard walking they came to a 
series of foothills and just ahead saw the small 
mountain where the abandoned mine was located. 
They passed through a patch of timber and then 
took to a road which was exceedingly rough, not 
having been used for several years. 

“ This section appears to be completely aban- 
doned,” remarked Gilbert after they had passed 
several houses and huts which stood wide open and 
tenantless. 

“ The inhabitants have been frightened away,” 
answered his chum. “ Perhaps — what’s that?” 

A distant shot had rung out, followed presently 
by another. It came from a rise of ground ahead, 
but they could see nobody. 

“ Sure, an’ was that shot meant fer us, I don’t 
know ? ” came from Dan Casey. 

“ Of it vos, it didn’t hit nobody,” returned Carl 
Stummer. 


10 6 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ I don’t think it was meant for us,” said Ben. 
“ Perhaps some hunter is out after game.” 

“ Or else it may have been a signal,” suggested 
Gilbert. 

“ A signal? ” 

“ Yes — to warn somebody that we were coming.” 

“ If that is so, we had better be careful how we 
proceed, Gilbert. We don’t want to run into any 
trap.” 

It was not long after this that they came upon the 
remains of a campfire which was still smoking. 
About the fire were the footprints of five or six men. 
The footprints led directly westward towards the 
mountains. 

“ Maybe this is where the shot came from,” said 
Ben. 

“ Do you see any evidence of game? ” 

“ Not a feather or a hair, Gilbert.” 

Again they passed on, and now found themselves 
skirting a tall cliff with a patch of trees and brush- 
wood just below. Another distant shot rang out. 

“ This is certainly getting interesting,” observed 
the young Southerner. “ Those fellows who are 
firing must be keeping out of our sight on purpose.” 

The outlook from under the cliff was a dismal one 
and they proceeded with caution until they came out 
in something of a valley between two mountain 


THE ABANDONED MINE 107 

ridges. Directly ahead was the opening they felt 
must lead to the abandoned mine. 

“ I see more footprints/’ announced Gilbert, and 
he pointed them out. They were those of seven or 
eight men and also the hoof-marks of two horses. 

A few minutes more of hard walking and they 
reached an old building at the mouth of one of the 
openings to the mine. Another opening was several 
hundred feet away. 

“ Let us stop at the building to investigate,” said 
Ben, and his advice was carried out. The door was 
closed, but they kicked it open with ease. 

They found but little within — the broken remains 
of a desk and two chairs, and a heap of rubbish in a 
corner. On the floor were some newly scattered 
scraps of paper which had been scribbled on with 
pencil. What the writing was they could not 
determine. 

While the others were investigating around the 
building, Casey and Stummer walked out towards 
the nearest mine opening. Now the German sharp- 
shooter set up a shout : 

“ Dare da vos ! Dare da vos ! ” 

“ Whom did you see ? ” demanded Ben, rushing 
out. 

“ Dree Roossians und some Chinesers.” 

“ Where?” 


108 UNDER. TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ Town py dot udder opening, Cabtain.” 

Stummer had scarcely spoken the last words 
when three rifle shots rang out and the bullets sped 
close by our friends. Then came another volley, 
and one of the Japanese soldiers, standing near the 
old building, was hit in the arm. 

“ They are firing on us ! ” cried Ben, and drew his 
pistol. But before he could fire in return, the Rus- 
sians and Chinese were out of sight. 

“ Come on into the mine,” came from Gilbert. 
“We must have struck the right trail, and if so, 
we may as well hunt those fellows out. There is no 
use of our staying outside.” 

The others were willing, and moving from the 
back of the building they entered the opening nearest 
at hand. Just as the last man disappeared within 
came another volley of shots, one bullet hitting a 
rock and then striking Ben on the shoulder. 

“Are you hurt?” questioned Gilbert quickly, as 
he saw his chum stagger back. 

“ Not much — it was a spent ball,” answered Ben, 
coolly. 

“ I see the rascal as fired it, bad luck to him ! ” 
came from Casey, and with quickness he raised his 
own rifle, took aim, and fired. A yell followed and 
a form was seen to fall among some bushes near the 
other mine opening. 


THE ABANDONED MINE IO9 

“ A goot shot, Tan ! ” cried Stummer. “ Dot’s 
der vay to fix ’em ! ” 

“ I hope we haven’t run into any trap,” came 
anxiously from Ben. “ For all we know, they may 
be able to fire at us from the front and the rear.” 

“ We’ll have to look over the ground,” answered 
Gilbert. 

After a hasty consultation, it was decided to leave 
the detachment of Japanese soldiers to guard the 
opening to the mine, while Ben and Gilbert with the 
two sharpshooters should make a brief tour of ex- 
ploration. Several torches had been brought along 
and one of these was lit. 

“ We’ve got to be careful,” said the young 
Southerner. “ We don’t want to be shot down in 
cold blood.” 

Some dirt had fallen from the roof of the mine, 
making the flooring below decidedly rough and un- 
certain. Scarcely had they passed fifty yards when 
they came to a number of rocks, around which they 
had to pick their way with care. 

“ I believe this whole mine is about ready to cave 
in,” said Ben. 

“ Veil, I ton’t vont it to cave in ven I vos inside,” 
was Stummer’s comment. “ I ton’t vont to pe 
killed alife, not me! ” 

Dan Casey was in advance, peering ahead with 


no 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


eyes as sharp as those of some wild animal. But 
this watchfulness was, for the time being, useless, as 
they soon discovered. 

“ We’re blocked,” came from Gilbert, ten minutes 
later, and he spoke the truth. Ahead the roof of 
the mine had fallen, filling the passageway with big 
rocks and dirt. 

“ This opening is now nothing but a big cave,” 
said Ben, after a look around. “ There is only one 
way out and that is the way by which we came 
in.” 

“ And if those Russians and Chinese are watch- 
ing that opening we are trapped,” answered his 
chum. 

They continued to hunt around, and presently 
Gilbert discovered an upper gallery, with an opening 
just large enough for one man to pass through at a 
time. He called on the others to follow him and 
the four proceeded several hundred feet further. 

“ Listen ! ” cried the young Southerner presently. 
“ I think I hear voices. Put out the light.” 

The torch was extinguished and by listening in- 
tently they made out several voices, coming from a 
distance. 

“ I’m going on to investigate,” said Gilbert. 
“ You had better remain here until I come back.” 

“ Let me go along,” put in Ben, and so it was 


THE ABANDONED MINE III 

arranged, Stummer and Casey promising to remain 
on guard, against a possible attack from the rear, 
for there was no telling what was now occurring at 
the point where they had left the Japanese detach- 
ment. 

With extreme caution the two young Americans 
crawled forward, for just ahead the opening nar- 
rowed to a space scarcely two feet in diameter. 
They went up over a rock and then came out to 
where there was what might be termed a pocket, 
with a slit several inches in width, through which 
the light of a campfire was streaming. 

From the slit they could look directly down into 
the second opening of the old mine, the flooring of 
which was a good twenty feet lower than where 
they stood. Below them they saw the fire, the 
smoke of which lost itself in a hollow on the op- 
posite side of the rocky chamber. Around the fire 
were gathered about twenty men, half Russians and 
half Chinese, all dressed in furs and heavily armed. 
At a distance two horses were tethered to' a big log. 

“ These fellows must surely be brigands,” whis- 
pered Ben. 

“ Or otherwise a nest of Russian spies, who are 
making this their rendezvous and have hired the 
Chinese to aid them,” answered the young South- 


erner. 


1 12 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


They continued to gaze at the men around the 
campfire, and presently saw two other persons join 
the number. 

“ Boschnoff ! ” murmured Ben. 

“ And Olaf Pallak ! ” added his chum. “ Ben, we 
have struck the trail beyond a doubt.” 

“ Yes, but what are we to do next? ” 

“ We must capture those fellows if we possibly 
can.” 

“ I agree with you, but it will be no easy thing to 
do. They outnumber us two to one.” 

“ If we can only hold them in the mine until we 
can get reenforcements, perhaps we can make them 
surrender.” 

“ That is certainly a good scheme.” 

They saw Pallak and Boschnoff retire to a corner 
and hold an earnest conversation. Presently two 
other Russians joined them and also one of the burly 
Chinese. 

“ They are hatching out some plan to outwit us,” 
whispered Gilbert. “ The sooner we get more help 
the better it will be for us.” 

Leaving Ben to remain on watch, he turned back 
into the passageway and told Casey and Stummer 
of his discovery. Then all three hurried to where 
the Japanese soldiers had been stationed. 

“We must guard that other opening to' the mine,” 


THE ABANDONED MINE 1 1 3 

announced Gilbert, to the soldiers. “ Let no man 
get away under any circumstances.” 

Then two privates were dispatched with a note 
for Major Okopa, explaining the situation and ask- 
ing for assistance at the earliest possible moment. 


CHAPTER XIII 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS 

“ I’d like to know one thing,” said Ben, after the 
guards had gone for assistance and Gilbert had re- 
turned to the passageway. “ Has that part of the 
mine below us another opening besides that which 
our men are guarding? ” 

“ There doesn’t seem to be another opening in 
sight, Ben.” 

“ The Chinese have moved to the front.” 

“And the Russians too?” 

“ Only a few of them. Several have remained to 
talk to Pallak and Boschnoff.” 

“ Can you make out what it is about? ” 

“ Only a few words. Perhaps you’ll have better 
success.” 

The young Americans drew up to the slit once 
more and listened with strained ears to what was 
being said below. Pallak, Boschnoff, and a stranger 
were talking with increased earnestness, and pre- 
sently the trio moved to a spot directly below where 
Gilbert was in hiding. 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS 1 1 5 

For a little while the young Southerner could not 
make out what was being said. Then he caught 
the name of Nathan Chase and a remark uttered by 
Olaf Pallak. 

“ I intend to hold him,” said Pallak positively. 
“ To send him off now would be foolish.” 

“ It is a dangerous business,” responded Bosch- 
noff. “Am I not right?” He appealed to the 
third member of the party. 

“ I can do what Olaf does,” said the third Rus- 
sian, with a shrug of his brawny shoulders. “ I am 
not afraid of these dogs of Americans, nor of the 
Japanese either.” 

“ You think you can make money out of the 
man?” questioned Boschnoff, turning again to 
Pallak. 

“ I can if I can get him away. Do not doubt but 
that his family will pay well to get him back in 
safety once more.” 

“ But you’ll not expose yourself, Olaf? ” 

“ I am not so foolish, friend Boschnoff. I’ll 
make it appear as if he were in the hands of these 
dogs of Chinese. They’ll do anything for a hand- 
ful of rubles” 

“ What of those who have followed us ? ” 

“ A handful of Japanese soldiers. We can easily 
dispose of them, or else ” 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


1 1 6 

The rest of the talk was unintelligible to Gilbert, 
for the men turned away and walked in another 
direction. But he had "heard enough. 

“ One thing is now proven,” he said to his chum. 
“ Pallak has Nathan Chase in his power and is 
going to hold him for a ransom. He is going to 
make it appear as if the merchant was carried off by 
the Chunchuses. He says he can get the scoundrelly 
Chinks to do his bidding.” 

“ Doesn’t he seem to be alarmed because we are in 
this vicinity? ” 

“ Evidently none of the party recognized you and 
myself, Ben. They think it is only an ordinary 
Japanese scouting party.” 

“ Even so they must know they are running the 
risk o i being captured, especially now after shots 
have been exchanged.” 

“ I don’t understand it myself.” Gilbert’s face 
showed his perplexity. “ I trust Major Okopa 
doesn’t lose any time in sending us additional men.” 

“ Did they say where Mr. Chase was being kept a 
prisoner? ” 

“ No, but I’ll make Pallak confess, once I have 
him a prisoner.” 

“ He may prove very stubborn.” 

“ Never mind, I’ll manage him,” and the young 
Southerner shut his teeth hard. 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS 117 

As there seemed to be nothing more to learn by 
remaining in the passageway, the two young 
Americans left that portion of the old mine and re- 
joined Casey, Stummer, and the others at the open- 
ing near the old building. 

“ Have you seen any of them? ” questioned Ben. 

“ Nary a wan av thim,” came from the Irish 
sharpshooter. “ Sure an’ are ye certain they are 
still in the hole in the ground? ” 

“ Yes.” 

“ Den da got respect for our guns,” came from 
Stummer. “ Maype da ton’t vos vants to stand up 
for a target alretty ! ” And he smiled broadly. 

“ Well, I shouldn’t blame ’em for that,” replied 
Ben. “ You are both getting too handy about pick- 
ing a man off.” 

A half hour went by and still nobody appeared at 
the mouth of the other opening to the mine. The 
men had been stationed in various places, so that 
they could command every portion of the opening. 

“ This certainly looks queer,” said Ben, at length. 
“ Gilbert, I think I’d better go back to the pas- 
sageway and make certain that they are still in 
there.” 

“ Go ahead. Fm going to watch out here. They 
may be getting ready for a dash.” 

Torch in hand Ben made his way over the dirt 


Il8 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

and rocks and up to the pocket where they had taken 
their observations. Then he put out his light. 

The first thing that struck his eye as he glanced 
through the slit was the fact that the campfire in 
the opening below had been allowed to die down un- 
til it was on the point of going out. Then, a look 
around convinced him that the Russians and the 
Chinese had vanished from the spot! 

“ Our cake is dough as sure as fate ! ” he mut- 
tered to himself, and relighting his torch, he 
crawled back and ran to' where he had left his chum 
beside Stummer. 

“ Well?” 

“ They are gone! ” 

“ Never, Ben! ” 

“ It is true. The fire is almost out and I couldn’t 
see a single one of them.” 

“ It must be a trick. How could they leave ? ” 

“ They either got past our men without being 
seen or else they have gone by some other route.” 

Gilbert’s face fell and he uttered a low whistle. 

“ This is the worst yet. You are certain, Ben ? ” 

“ Go look for yourself if you wish.” 

“ It’s too bad ! Do you know what I’ve a mind 
to do?” 

“ Rush that opening yonder? ” 

“ Exactly.” 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS II9 

“ Say der vord und I vos mit you ! ” cried Carl 
Stummer. “ I ton’t like dis vaiting aroundt doin’ 
noddings.” 

“ We’ll have to go about it with care,” said Ben. 
“ I have no wish to stick my head in the lion’s 
mouth.” 

“ You can stay back if you want to,” answered 
the young Southerner, who was beginning to grow 
reckless. 

“ No ; if the men are willing to go, I’ll go too.” 

The matter was explained, and all of the Japanese 
and also Dan Casey were willing to rush the open- 
ing. Directions were accordingly given, and at a 
certain signal all ran forward and up to the opening 
from whence the firing had come. 

Not a shot was fired, and inside of five minutes 
the movement came to an end and all found 
themselves in the other entrance to the abandoned 
mine. 

“ They are gone, that is dead certain,” murmured 
Gilbert. “ Come on ! ” And he swung down the 
passageway, a torch in one hand and a pistol in the 
other. Ben ranged by his side and so did Stummer 
and Casey, while the Japanese privates brought up a 
close rear, holding their rifles in a position to blaze 
away at an instant’s notice. 

As in the other opening, the way was rough and 


120 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


uncertain and once Stummer went down flat on his 
stomach. His weapon was discharged and he ut- 
tered a groan of pain. 

“Have you shot yourself?” questioned Ben 
quickly. 

“ Not a bit of it ! ” gasped the sharpshooter. 
“ But mine vint vos knocked into a dousand bieces 
alretty ! ” And he began to gasp for breath. 

The others ran on, leaving the German sharp- 
shooter to limp after them, still trying to get back 
his wind. Soon a turn brought them to where the 
two horses had been tethered and just beyond was 
the campfire, now reduced to nothing but glowing 
ashes. 

“ You are right, they have taken time by the fore- 
lock and fled,” said Gilbert, as he waved a torch 
around, while several did likewise. “ Not a trace 
of them anywhere ! ” 

They ran around the rocky chamber and it was 
not long before they found a large passageway, 
hidden from their view when at the slit in the rocks 
above. Down this passageway Russians and Chi- 
nese had undoubtedly taken their departure. 

Gilbert and Ben looked at each other. Should 
they follow the enemy? Would it be safe to do 
so? 

“ T m willing to go if you are,” said Ben. He 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS 


2 


was not going to allow his chum to get ahead of him 
this time. 

“Very well, forward we go!” cried the young 
Southerner, and they entered the passageway, which 
led upward and gradually opened into a small valley 
between two high hills. In the valley was a tiny 
lake surrounded by a heavy belt of trees. The thick 
snow lay everywhere, covering the brushwood as 
with a pall. 

The winter day was drawing to a close and they 
had to strain their eyes to see any distance ahead. 
But the trail of the fleeing ones was at their feet, 
so they knew exactly how to push on. 

“ Let us send a man back, with word for the 
major, should he come,” suggested Ben, and this 
was done. Then they passed across the lake, a solid 
mass of ice, and began to climb the hill opposite. 

Bang! crack! bang! The shots came without 
warning, and one of the Japanese soldiers staggered 
and fell, shot in the side. Gilbert felt a stinging 
sensation in the shoulder. 

“ Gilbert, what is it ? ” cried his chum. 

“ Tve been shot — but — but I reckon it isn’t 
much.” 

Looking ahead, they could see the Russians and 
the Chinese climbing the slope of a hill. The 
Japanese fired on them, and so did the two sharp- 


122 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


shooters, and a Russian was seen to go down, fol- 
lowed by a Chinaman. Then the flying party dis- 
appeared from view. 

Ben tore the clothing from Gilbert’s shoulder. 
The wound was nothing more than a deep cut, and 
it was quickly bound up. The young Southerner 
was glad it was no worse. 

“ A few inches closer and it would have killed 
me,” he remarked, with a shudder. 

The Japanese soldier who had been struck was 
pretty badly wounded and two of his companions 
did what they could for him. All got behind the 
trees and looked at Ben and Gilbert for further 
orders. 

“ It’s no use,” said Ben. “ We can’t go 
on. They have the advantage of us in numbers. 
We’ll have to wait until we hear from Major 
Okopa.” 

“ But night is coming on — they’ll get away in the 
darkness,” returned his chum, with a sigh, while a 
troubled look came into his face. 

“ We can follow the tracks in the snow.” 

“ That is true.” 

Anxiously they waited for the coming of the 
major. But it was more than three hours before 
the Japanese commander put in an appearance, fol- 
lowed by a hundred picked men of the University 


A FIGHT IN THE HILLS 123 

Corps, as the special command was officially 
designated. 

“We certainly must catch those rascals/' he said, 
when he had heard the tale the young Americans 
had to tell. “We must not lose a moment in fol- 
lowing them up." 


CHAPTER XIV 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE 

Although he had been wounded, Gilbert in- 
sisted upon accompanying the others, and soon the 
whole party set off, following the tracks in the snow 
as best they could. 

In order not to give the enemy an advantage, they 
marched without light of any kind, across the valley 
and along a small series of hills leading to a large 
mountain to the northwestward. 

“ I hope we catch them napping,” said Ben. 

“ Perhaps we may — if they think we have given 
up the chase,” answered his chum. 

In less than an hour a good two miles were 
covered. It was now intensely cold and the few 
stars that had come out went under a heavy bank of 
clouds. 

“ I am afraid the chase must come to an end,” 
said Major Okopa, after consulting with one of his 
soldiers, a fellow who was a good deal of a weather 
prophet. 


124 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE 1 25 

“ Why ? ” came from both of the young Amer- 
icans. 

“ Kawam says it is going to snow and that very 
soon. The snow will hide the trail. More than 
that, it may render it very difficult for us to get 
back to camp.” 

“ It’s a great pity,” said Ben. “ Hadn’t we bet- 
ter go at least a little further ? ” 

“ Oh, yes, we can do that, if you wish it.” 

They were almost at the foot of the tall mountain 
when the snow began to come down. The heavy 
flakes fell thickly, so that between them and 
the darkness the landscape was completely blotted 
out. 

“ This is certainly bad luck,” was the comment of 
the young Southerner, as he peered about them dis- 
mally. “ Ben, it looks as if we weren’t meant to 
capture those rascals.” 

“ We’ll be lucky to get back to camp, Gilbert. 
The snow is coming down thicker every moment.” 

It was certainly a heavy fall and by the time they 
were turning back it was extremely difficult to fol- 
low the trail. The wind was rising and this caused 
the snow to drift. 

“ I reckon it’s no mean thing to be lost among 
these hills in a snowstorm,” said Gilbert. “ Br-r-r ! 
but it’s nasty! ” and he gave a shiver. 


126 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


As quickly as they could they made their way 
along the back trail until the tiny lake was reached. 
It was now totally dark and they could not see a 
dozen feet in any direction. 

“ We’ll not get back to our camp to-night,” an- 
nounced Major Okopa. “ We’ll be fortunate to 
reach the old mine.” 

“ Well, that won’t make a bad resting-place, in 
such a storm as this,” returned Ben. 

Having rested for a few moments they set off 
once more. Walking was now by no means easy, 
and when it came to climbing out of the hollow more 
than one of the party slipped and fell. 

“ Whoop! I’m down!” came from Dan Casey, 
as he struck a bit of ice covered with snow and 
rolled over and over. 

“ Come here and let me sthop you ! ” answered 
Stummer cheerfully, but he had scarcely spoken 
when he also went down, burying his face in a foot 
of snow. 

“ That’s right, Carl, ye are afther wantin’ a 
wash ! ” sang out the Irish sharpshooter. “ Come 
here an’ lit me hang ye out on th’ line to dry ! ” 
And then both laughed, and so did Ben and Gilbert. 
Even the Japanese enjoyed the situation and grinned 
silently. 

It was midnight by the time they came in sight of 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE 127 

the abandoned mine. Feeling that no enemy was 
around, they entered boldly, to find the spot exactly 
as they had left it. 

“ Come, light up a fire, somebody ! ” cried Ben. 
“ I’m about half frozen ! ” And a roaring wood 
fire was started without delay. Then a second blaze 
was set going, and soon that portion of the old mine 
began to warm up, much to their satisfaction. A 
few rations had been brought along and these were 
divided among all present. The Japanese also had 
tea, and when this was steeped and served it helped 
to warm them up still further. 

“ Well, this ends the chase of Pallak and his tools 
for the present,” said Ben, before retiring for the 
night. “ It’s too bad to let the rascal get away in 
this fashion.” 

“ We have learned one thing,” returned Gilbert. 
“ We know that Mr. Chase is in his power.” 

“ And that Pallak is going to hold the merchant 
for some sort of a ransom. Do you suppose Miss 
Chase has any money ? ” 

“ More than likely she has, but I’d hate to see her 
give it up to such a scoundrel as Olaf Pallak.” 

“ Oh, I’d hate that myself. I wish he could be 
tricked into thinking he was going to get something 
and that we could then get hold of him.” 

All were tired out, and after a guard had been set 


128 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


the others lost no time in going to sleep. The guard 
was changed three times before morning, so that all 
might get rest. 

Much to their satisfaction, the storm cleared away 
by sunrise, leaving the air mild and exhilarating. 
Without breakfast, the march was begun for camp 
without further delay, the distance being covered 
some time before noon. 

As soon as they could do so, Major Okopa, Ben, 
and Gilbert reported to their superiors what had 
taken place, but nothing further could be done just 
then towards capturing Pallak and his followers, for 
the University Corps and the other troops had been 
ordered forward once more. 

Before leaving the camp and striking out on the 
weary march northward once more, Gilbert and Ben 
sent a long letter to Grace Chase, telling her of what 
they had learned and begging her not to be too much 
downcast. They made the communication as cheer- 
ful as possible, yet they felt that it would surely have 
a depressing effect on the merchant’s daughter. 

“ She’ll imagine all sorts of things,” said Ben, 
with a sad shake of his head. “ I suppose she has 
heard of these Chinese brigands and how, when 
they don’t get what they want, they cut off an ear 
of their captive, just to show that they mean bus- 
iness.” 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE 1 29 

“ Perhaps so, Ben. But you must remember Olaf 
Pallak isn’t a Chunchuse. ,, 

“ No, but I guess he is just as bad at heart. For 
all he and his tool, Boschnoff, cared, they would 
have let us burn up in that fire at Port Arthur.’* 

“ I’d like to know just where Nathan Chase is at 
the present time.” 

“ So would I.” 

The army mail came in just before the march was 
begun and there was a letter for Gilbert from his old 
firm, the Richmond Importing Company, asking 
how he was getting along and mentioning several 
business matters. Ben also had a letter, written by 
his brother Walter, who since leaving the American 
navy had settled down to become a business man, 
as we have learned. The latter communication ran, 
in part, as follows : 

“ Was awfully glad to hear from you and Larry, 
and also from Gilbert. You have certainly got 
soldier blood in your veins and so has Gilbert, and as 
for Larry, I don’t suppose he can live without the 
ocean under him. Well, go ahead and cover your- 
selves with glory, but don’t 4 come home kilt ! ’ as 
our friend Casey would say. Give him my regards, 
and also remember me to Stummer. 

“ Business is very good just at present, although 


130 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


like everybody else I have had my own troubles in 
certain directions. Everybody here seems to think 
that if Japan can only hold out she will certainly win 
in this war. It must seem strange to you to be a 
subject of the Mikado, for I understand you had to 
give up being an out-and-out Yankee when you 
joined the army. 

“ Uncle Job is very well, seems to be getting 
younger instead of older. The new addition to the 
house is finished, and Uncle Job has put in a regular 
library of good books, which he says he is going to 
study. He isn’t a bit mean any more and folks in 
Buffalo now speak of him as a public-spirited citizen, 
which seems to tickle him not a little. Ben, I can 
tell you that times have changed mightily since the 
day when we three boys ran away from home, Larry 
to fight under Dewey, you to join our volunteers in 
Cuba, and I to see service in Cuban waters. And 
they have changed very much for the better, don’t 
you think so ? ” 

Ben read the letter with deep interest and then 
turned it over to Gilbert. He was glad to learn that 
matters at home were going along so well. For just 
an instant he felt a little homesick, and he turned 
away to do some necessary work, so that he might 
forget it. 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE I3I 

“ Walter ought to be out here just now/’ was Gil- 
bert’s comment, as he gave the letter back. “ He’d 
think this was something else besides glory. It’s 
going to be a beastly march to-day.” 

So it proved, and by nightfall the young soldiers 
felt thoroughly wretched and dismal. A mist had 
come up during the afternoon which, at sundown, 
turned to a fine rain. The damp air cut to the very 
marrow of their bones. 

“ I’d give a month’s pay to have summer 
weather,” remarked Ben, as he huddled close to a 
campfire. 

“ Or else be campaigning in Cuba,” suggested 
Gilbert. “ Do you remember our first nights in the 
open, down there, Ben ? ” 

“ Indeed I do — with the flies, mosquitoes, and 
gnats. One comfort, we haven’t any mosquitoes to 
bother us.” 

More troops were coming in, and soon the camp 
presented an animated appearance, with huge bon- 
fires roaring on every side, lighting up the plain for 
the distance of quarter of a mile. Food was to be 
had in plenty, so nobody suffered on that score. As 
in all other things, the commissary department of 
the Japanese army ran like clockwork, and during 
their entire campaign the young Americans never 
received anything that was not fit to eat. It is true 


132 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


that they occasionally grew tired of rice bread and 
longed for a loaf of wheat or even rye, but this was 
nothing over which to complain. 

As the army moved northward again, both Ben 
and Gilbert came to localities they had before visited 
— when on the advance against Liao Yang. They 
even met several people they knew, and from one of 
the men learned that Gilbert’s old enemy, Ivan Sno- 
koff, was now wretchedly poor and in rather bad 
health. 

“ I think he deserves his fate,” said the young 
Southerner. “ He played me more than one mean 
trick.” 

“ It’s the way of the majority of evil-doers,” 
added Ben. “ Give them rope enough and sooner 
or later they’ll hang themselves.” 

Fortunately for the young soldiers, the weather 
remained good for a week after the rain and snow, 
and during that time the army pressing northward 
made fairly good progress. There was some dif- 
ficulty in getting the supply wagons and carts 
through, and occasionally a cannon would get stuck 
in the slush and mud, but that was all. 

“ We are bound to get there somehow,” said Gil- 
bert cheerfully. “ And when we reach the front, I 
rather think we’ll be able to give the Russians a hot 
time of it.” 


WITH THE ARMY ONCE MORE 1 33 

“Do you look for a battle in the near future ?” 
asked his chum. 

“ Major Okopa thinks we’ll get into action before 
very long. He says we are to press the Russians 
hard, and they’ll either have to fight or run.” 


CHAPTER XV 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 

“ We are pretty well to the front now, Gilbert.” 

It was Ben who spoke. The young captain was 
seated on a bench in front of a small house, which 
some Chinamen had deserted a long time before. 
Close at hand was a bonfire, over which his chum 
and Major Okopa had been warming themselves. 

After a weary march that was not to be easily for- 
gotten, the special command under Major Okopa 
had reached the town of Sha-pi-ho, a place located a 
dozen miles to the westward of Liao Yang. The 
town was full of troops, for the whole of General 
Nogi’s force was gradually concentrating there. 
The army consisted for the most part of infantry, 
but there was a fair body of cavalry to the front, and 
batteries of no mean proportions were arriving 
daily. 

Under the generalship of that wise military com- 
mander, Field Marshal Oyama, who had his head- 
quarters on the line of the railroad running from 
Liao Yang to Mukden, the Japanese army was now 


134 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 1 35 

formed into five divisions. To the extreme west 
was Nogi, as already mentioned. In the center were 
Generals Oku and Nodzu. On the right was Gen- 
eral Kuroki, while to the extreme east, operating in 
a fashion to blind the Russians as to the real plan 
of the Japanese, was General Kawamura. The 
Japanese line covered at least a hundred and ten 
miles and at times spread out to a hundred and 
twenty-five miles ! On such a vast field as this was 
one of the greatest battles this world has ever seen 
to be fought. 

The fall of Port Arthur had released many Japa- 
nese soldiers located at that place, and it can be truth- 
fully said that the Czar’s troops were now being 
confronted by practically the entire force of the 
Mikado. 

“Yes, we are pretty well to the north,” came from 
Gilbert, in reply to his chum’s remark. “ But I 
rather think we’ve got to push further yet before 
we get any real fighting, although we may have a 
skirmish or two.” 

“ I’ve been thinking of Larry. I wonder what he 
is doing these days.” 

“ Oh, pounding Russian ships in true naval style, 
I suppose.” 

“ In one way, I wish he was with us. It would be 
more pleasant to be together.” 


136 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ True, but Larry is a sea-dog and always will be. 
Even when he was ashore in Luzon he didn’t feel 
entirely at home — he told me so himself.” 

After a stop for three days at Sha-pi-ho the army 
moved forward once more. The Hun River, still 
frozen over, was crossed with ease by cavalry, in- 
fantry, and cannon, and then the march was for 
several days on a line parallel with the Liao River, 
which flowed west of them. It was a vast plain 
they were crossing, dotted here and there with small 
streams and patches of timber and brushwood. 

To the extreme eastward the skirmishes preced- 
ing the great battle had already begun. The divi- 
sion of the Yalu, under Kawamura, met the outposts 
of General Linevitch at Chin-ho-chen. The Rus- 
sians retreated and the Japanese followed them up 
steadily, driving the followers of the Czar in the 
direction of Fushan, where General Kuropatkin had 
his headquarters. As the ground was frozen hard, 
it was impossible for the Russians to throw up in- 
trenchments, and so they had to retreat until they 
came upon the main body of Linevitch’s forces. 

In the meantime General Oku was advancing 
along the railroad. Here the Russians fought with 
desperation, for the railroad meant practically every- 
thing to them. But they could not hold back this 
hard-hitting old Japanese soldier, and he beat them 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 1 37 

back day after day, protecting himself as best he 
could in each newly-acquired position. 

By the end of February it began to look to the 
Russians as if all of the fighting was to be in the east 
and at the center, and they scattered their forces 
accordingly. They knew absolutely nothing of the 
great army gathered under General Nogi which was 
slowly but surely advancing in the west. By the 
first of March this cold, calculating Japanese general 
had reached a point as far to the north as Mukden 
but some miles to the west of that city of impor- 
tance. 

“ Now we are going to see some fighting,” said 
Gilbert, and he was right. On the very next day 
they encountered a small body of the Russians and a 
skirmish lasting half an hour ensued. It only served 
to warm the soldiers up, and before long the enemy 
was in retreat, having found the Japanese entirely 
too strong for them. 

“ This will wake the Czar’s men up, and they’ll 
know what to expect at this end of the fighting 
line,” said Ben. 

It was true, and much alarmed over the new dan- 
ger which threatened him, Kuropatkin sent word to 
General Kaulbars to stop the advance of any troops 
which might be found trying to turn the Russian 
right flank. Alas for the Russian commander-in- 


138 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN , 

chief, his orders came too late to be of real value in 
stemming the mighty advance under General Nogi. 

Bound to do his best, General Kaulbars sent out 
two divisions of soldiers as quickly as he could get 
them together. One division went ahead of the 
other, so that the two reached the field of battle 
about five hours apart. 

“ The enemy is advancing upon us ! ” was the cry 
which rang through the camp of the Mikado’s men, 
and soon messages were flying in all directions. 
Less than fifteen minutes later the Japanese advance 
guard was fired upon and had to fall back on the 
main body of troops. 

But General Nogi was not caught napping and he 
lost no time in spreading out his army to the best 
possible advantage. The ground was hard and 
covered with snow, and places of even scant shelter 
were at a premium. 

“ This is going to be a fight in the open, Gilbert,” 
cried Ben. His heart was beating fast, for this he 
felt was going to be no light encounter. 

The young Southerner was looking to his pistol, 
to make sure the weapon was ready for use. He 
slipped it back into his belt with satisfaction. 

“ You’re right, Ben ; and I reckon the best army 
is going to win.” 

“ They are at it already.” 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 1 39 

“ So I hear.” 

A minute later Major Okopa had his special com- 
mand ready for action and was given orders to move 
ahead and to the left. The men went forward on 
the double quick. 

“ Banzai! Banzai Nippon! ” was the cry. 
“ Hurrah ! Hurrah for Japan ! ” And cheer after 
cheer rent the air. But then the soldiers became 
silent, for they realized that they had deadly work to 
do and the fate of their country might hang upon 
the results. 

Ben and Gilbert and their companies felt the first 
shock of the battle in the middle of the morning. A 
shell was thrown over their heads, killing several 
men of a command in their rear. Then came a vol- 
ley from some Russian soldiers, who were coming 
forward, yelling like demons. 

“ Fire! ” came the command from Major Okopa, 
in Japanese, and crack! came a volley from the first 
company. This was followed by several other vol- 
leys, and a moment later Gilbert found himself in 
the thick of the fray, with Ben not a great distance 
away. 

As often happens with the best of soldiers, Gilbert 
had been a bit timid at the very start of the contest. 
But the sight of the men blown to pieces by the shell 
caused his hot, Southern fighting blood to surge 


140 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

through his veins, and he waved his sword over his 
head. 

“ Forward and at them! ” he called out. “ For- 
ward for Nippon and the Mikado! ” 

The men answered with a cheer, and volley after 
volley was discharged at the Russians at close range. 
Then came a hand-to-hand fight, the officers using 
their swords and the privates their bayonets or their 
clubbed guns. It was a fierce contest, thrilling, to 
behold, and made every heart beat wildly with 
excitement. 

Gilbert was fighting a tall Cossack who was doing 
his best to reach the young American with his long 
sword. Click-clack! went the two blades, striking 
fire at every cut. Then a Cossack private ran up 
and tried to bayonet Gilbert from the side. 

“No, you don’t!” cried the young Southerner, 
and wheeling quickly, he caught the gun by the 
barrel and thrust it aside. Then his sword fell on 
the private’s head and down went the fellow with a 
cut that laid him senseless. 

A rush of two Japanese soldiers had kept the Cos- 
sack officer from getting at Gilbert, but now he came 
on once more and the two swords struck fire as 
before. Then of a sudden the Cossack gave a twist 
that sent Gilbert’s blade flying from his grasp. 

“Dog! I have you now!” yelled the Cossack 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 141 

and raised his blade to slay his opponent. But just 
as the cut was about to be delivered he started, fell 
back, and expired from a shot in the temple ! 

“ Gilbert, what’s the matter ? ” It was Ben who 
asked the question. He came running up with the 
blood streaming from a deep scratch on his right 
hand. 

“ I — I — that fellow knocked my sword from my 
hand. Did — did you fire the shot that killed him ? ” 
was Gilbert’s reply. 

“ No.” 

“ Then who did ? ” 

“ I don’t know. It must have been a stray bullet. 
But it was a lucky shot for you.” 

“ It was, and I thank Providence for it,” mur- 
mured Gilbert fervidly. 

There was no time to say more, for the tide of 
battle was surging on all sides of them. The Rus- 
sians were fighting stubbornly, trying to beat back 
the Japanese who would not grant an inch. Already 
hundreds had either been killed or wounded, and the 
snow was dyed crimson with human blood. 

So far General Nogi had not brought up more 
than half his force. But now other troops were 
coming to the front, and slowly but surely the Rus- 
sians had to give ground. 

“They are retreating!” was the cry from the 


142 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Mikado’s followers. “ They are retreating ! Do 
not let them escape! Let us capture them! ” 

As the Russians were driven back, the Japanese 
came on, and a little later Major Okopa’s command 
found itself in a corner, between a slight rise of 
ground and a clump of evergreen trees. Here the 
fighting became as fierce as ever, and the major and 
Ben found themselves suddenly face to face with 
four brutal-looking Russian soldiers. 

“ The officers ! Kill them ! ” came from one of 
the Russians, who belonged to the peasantry. He 
was not much of a soldier, having been drafted into 
the army but a short while before. But he was 
heavy and strong, and he sprang in with clubbed 
gun as if to crush Ben’s skull. 

“ That’s the talk, Svad ! ” cried one of his com- 
panions. “ Kill them ! Do not let the dirty dogs 
escape ! ” And he too fell upon the young cap- 
tain, while the two other Russians tackled Major 
Okopa. 

It was a fierce onslaught, yet the young captain 
and his superior did their best to defend themselves. 
No other officers or men happened to be near and 
they knew they must do for themselves or take the 
consequences. 

With a quick turn of his sword Major Okopa 
succeeded in inflicting a slight wound, and Ben hit 


THE BATTLE OF MUKDEN BEGINS 


143 


one of the Russians in the face, something that 
caused the fellow to start back for the moment. But 
then the Russians came on in a solid body, and 
major and captain were hurled flat, with their four 
enemies on top of them ! 


CHAPTER XVI 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 

During the battle of Liao Yang Ben had learned 
a trick concerning the use of his sword which now 
stood him in good stead, and perhaps was the means 
of saving his life. 

As the Russians fell upon him, he raised the blade, 
allowing the handle to rest upon the frozen ground. 
The first man to come down upon him, escaped the 
sword, but the second man in his haste fell squarely 
upon it, allowing the blade to run through his side. 

“ He has stabbed me ! ” yelled the Russian, in 
agony. “ I am a dead man ! ” And he drew him- 
self away with difficulty. 

Just as these words were uttered came the muf- 
fled report of a pistol. Major Okopa had fired 
with two men upon him, and one of the enemy was 
shot in the abdomen, a wound which proved mortal. 
As the wounded man arose to his knees and stag- 
gered back the major fired again, hitting the second 
assailant in the shoulder. 

But one man now remained unharmed and he was 


144 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 145 

fighting desperately with Ben. Others were com- 
ing to his assistance, and it looked as if the young 
American would be killed in spite of all he could do 
to save himself. The burly Russian had him by the 
throat with one hand and by the sword arm with 
the other. The fellow’s musket, unloaded, lay at 
his side. 

At this juncture a cry of Banzai! was heard, and 
Gilbert’s company came into view, around a patch of 
evergreens. They fired as they ran, and so did the 
young Southerner, and in less time than it takes to 
tell it the Russians received half a dozen bullets 
which placed them out of the contest forever. 

“ Are you injured, Ben?” asked Gilbert, as he 
saw his chum and Major Okopa stagger to their 
feet. 

“ I — I — don’t know,” was the gasped-out answer. 
“ Those fellows came down on me like a load of 
bricks ! ” 

“ How about you, Major? ” 

“ I suffered as Captain Russell suffered, that is 
all,” was the quiet answer. “ I see we are driving 
them back in fine style,” continued the Japanese 
officer. 

What he mentioned was true — there had been a 
break all along the Russian front, and now with 
increased cries of Banzai! Banzai Nippon! the 


146 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

force of the Mikado was hurling itself forward, fir- 
ing as it ran and causing the Russians to retreat for 
upward of half a mile. 

After fighting for fully an hour and a half, and 
losing eight men killed and ten wounded, Major 
Okopa’s special command was ordered back and 
fresh troops came to the front. The brief respite 
was needed, for the soldiers, tough though they 
were, were almost exhausted. 

“ This is what I call fighting! ” declared Gilbert, 
while he dressed the slight wounds he had received. 
“ Those Russians go in like demons ! ” 

“ I thought my last hour on earth had come when 
they got me flat on my back,” came from Ben, who 
was also caring for his hurts. “ If that fellow had 
not fallen on my sword, it would certainly have gone 
hard with me.” 

The scene around them was horrifying in the 
extreme. The snow-covered plain was filled with 
the dead and the dying, and between the reports of 
the cannon and rattle of rifles came the shrieks of 
those in mortal agony. Already the hospital corps 
was on the field, carrying to the rear those whose 
lives might be saved. 

The first division of General Kaulbars’s army was 
practically in retreat when a shout was heard from 
the rear and the second division put in an appear- 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 147 

ance. These fresh troops hurled themselves at the 
Japanese with all their might, their leaders urging 
them to break the living wall of the Mikado’s men 
confronting them. The shock of battle was now 
greater than ever, and the slaughter something 
apalling. 

“ They are certainly fresh troops,” said Ben. 
“ And they look as if they had never been in a bat- 
tle before.” He was right in his surmise. The 
corps had just arrived from the interior of Russia, 
willing to do or die, but not knowing how to fight 
to the best advantage. The volleys from the Japa- 
nese mowed them down by hundreds, until, able 
to stand it no longer, they fell back and at last fairly 
ran to the camp from which they had come. 

It was not until nightfall that the firing gradually 
ceased, and by that time the Japanese soldiers who 
had borne the brunt of the contest were so fagged 
out they had to rest until morning. All told, General 
Nogi had lost in killed and wounded three hundred 
men. The lost to the Russians was between two 
and three thousand. 

The first movement of real importance in the 
great battle of Mukden had been gained by the 
Japanese. General Nogi had been able to swing his 
great army around in a semicircle to the eastward. 
Some of his troops were now within six miles of the 


148 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

railroad and less than a good day’s inarch from the 
city which was the Russian stronghold. All too late 
General Kuropatkin now knew positively that the 
main attack was to come from the west and center 
and not from the far east. 

The next day was bitterly cold and there was a 
touch of snow in the air. Scarcely a campfire 
could be built and most of the rations had to be eaten 
cold. At the hospital tents and huts the sufferings 
were beyond description. 

The larger portion of General Nogi’s army had 
now to rest for a couple of days. The fighting was 
taken up in the center, where Generals Oku and 
Nodzu were being pressed hard by General Bilder- 
ling. The Russians had possession of half a dozen 
villages, and the Mikado’s men tried to take these, 
entering on the run and fighting foot by foot, from 
one street to another and from one house or hut to 
the next. Firing was at random, and much of the 
fighting was hand-to-hand. The Japanese used 
thousands of hand grenades, which, when thrown by 
them, would explode as soon as they struck. Many 
buildings caught fire and wounded men who could 
not crawl away were roasted alive. Such are some 
of the horrors of war. 

At last the undaunted spirit of the Japanese had 
its effect, and having lost many thousands General 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 149 

Bilderling had to fall back on the support of those 
nearest to him. The fighting line between Oku and 
Nogi was now straightened, so that it faced to the 
northeast and almost straight towards the city of 
Mukden. 

The fighting in the far east had been slightly dis- 
astrous to the Japanese and with good reason. Here 
General Kuropatkin had a great body of men, the 
assault of which cost Kawamura dearly. But the 
Japanese general managed to obtain a fair footing 
among the hills, and this he kept in spite of the Rus- 
sian cannon fire and the intensely cold weather. 

Finding he must face the greatest attack from the 
west, General Kuropatkin sent additional troops in 
that direction, and once again General Nogi found 
himself in a position where he must either fight or 
retreat. As retreat was out of the question, he 
stood his ground, the soldiers throwing up such 
breastworks as they could, by filling bags with half- 
frozen dirt and sand, and by carrying thick planks, 
to be set up edgewise before them. 

Even this, the next day, was of no advantage. 
The command was “ Forward ! ” and thirty-five 
thousand men hurled themselves at the soldiers of 
the Czar. The shock was terrific, and it has been 
said by those who participated in this encounter that 
blood flowed like water. For a long while the Rus- 


150 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

sians refused to budge and it looked as if Nogi must 
be driven back or annihilated. One whole regiment 
was actually cut to pieces and other regiments lost 
more than half their men. The fight had extended 
further to the east and Oku and Nodzu were also in 
the struggle. Batteries from all around had been 
brought into play, thundering forth incessantly, un- 
til the noise was deafening. In desperation General 
Kuropatkin had removed his headquarters from 
Fushan to a point on the railroad north of Mukden 
and was now bringing into action every available 
man at his command. 

In the east Kawamura was holding his own and 
Kuroki was now in pursuit of some fleeing Russians. 
Nodzu felt that the line before him must also be 
weakening and sent out an advance guard, to find 
the Russians trenches deserted — trenches that had 
been held by the Czar’s men for months. With a 
cry of triumph the soldiers under Nodzu rushed for- 
ward and fell upon the Russians as they moved back 
in the direction of Fushan. Here, too, blood flowed 
freely, for the Russians gave ground but slowly 
after the first quarter of a mile was covered. 

And now came the first real note of alarm in the 
far west. Finding he could not hold the Japanese 
in the east, General Kuropatkin felt he must hold 
them in the west and at the center no matter at what 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 1 5 I 

cost. All the troops which could be gathered to- 
gether on the ninth of March were forced to the 
front, to stand against Nogi and Oku. Between the 
two Japanese generals was an opening much like the 
letter V and this Kuropatkin attempted to break 
asunder. But the Mikado’s men simply enveloped 
him, until regiment after regiment was either cap- 
tured, killed, or forced to retreat. Here, once more, 
the slaughter was as great as ever, and here went 
down to their death many leading Japanese and Rus- 
sian officers. 

In the fight the day previous Major Okopa had 
been seriously injured, a piece of shell hitting him 
on the left shoulder. The command of the Univer- 
sity Corps now devolved upon Gilbert, with Ben as 
his second. 

In the very thickest of the fight Gilbert was 
ordered to proceed to a point where there was a 
slight rise of ground, on the top of which was lo- 
cated an old warehouse, or barn. The Russians had 
been holding the structure, but a shell had set it on 
fire and the Czar’s men were now retreating. 

“ Forward ! ” cried the young Southerner, with- 
out delay, and the command obeyed on the double- 
quick. As soon as the warehouse was reached the 
fire was beaten out. Had he had the authority to 
do so, Gilbert would have followed up the enemy, 


152 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


but he had been told to stop at the rise of ground 
and there he and his men remained. 

“ Certainly a hot fight ! ” said Ben, who was in a 
perspiration, despite the fact that it was bitterly cold 
and a keen north breeze was blowing. 

“ Ben, I really think this is the greatest battle we 
have yet seen.” 

“ It is certainly as great as that of Liao Yang. 
Just look at the men who have fallen.” 

“ The Russians must realize the gravity of their 
situation. If we win this day, I think they’ll be 
forced to retreat.” 

“ You mean their whole army? ” 

“ Yes. It’s a fight to the finish. I believe all the 
reserves of both sides have been called out.” 

For the time being there was a lull around the old 
warehouse, as the tide of battle shifted to the west- 
ward. Then some Russian cavalry swept into view 
and Gilbert ordered his command to fire on them. 
Half a dozen fell and the remainder rode out of 
sight back of a small patch of timber. 

“ Our men are moving to the west,” announced 
Ben, a little later. “ Gilbert, they are leaving us. 
What does it mean? ” 

“ I don’t know,” answered the young Southerner 
anxiously. “ They are leaving, as sure as you are 
born ! ” 


MORE ABOUT THE GREAT BATTLE 1 53 

“ The Russians are coming again ! ” cried one of 
the soldiers stationed at an angle of the warehouse. 

“ They are coming this way from two direc- 
tions ! ” came another cry. 

In a few minutes more some of the Czar’s men 
were close enough to be fired upon, and Gilbert 
ordered his men to give them a volley. Several fell 
and the others fired in return, the bullets sweeping 
through the old building like hail. Then came an- 
other cry of alarm : 

“ The Russians are coming up from our rear ! 
We are being surrounded ! ” 

Gilbert wheeled around and saw the report was 
true. A whole Russian regiment was coming up on 
the double quick. In front of the warehouse were 
two other Russian commands. The place was truly 
surrounded, and it looked as if they were cut off 
and would either be killed or taken as prisoners of 
war! 


CHAPTER XVII 


SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY 

“ Gilbert, we are in a tight fix,” said Ben, as he 
gazed anxiously at the approaching enemy. 

“ So it would seem,” responded the young South- 
erner. “ What in the world made our regiments 
desert us in this fashion? ” 

“ I don’t know. But they are gone, towards that 
little village in the west.” 

“ We’ll have to fight for it,” continued Gilbert 
grimly, and issued the necessary orders. 

As presently constituted there were four com- 
panies in the University Corps. The young com- 
mander placed a company on each side of the 
somewhat square building. The soldiers were three 
rows deep and were ordered to fire in volleys, one 
row after another, as soon as the enemy were near 
enough. 

Scarcely had these arrangements been completed 
when the first of the volleys rang out and several 
Russians were seen to go down. Then came a vol- 
ley in return, but all in the building managed to 


154 


SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY 1 55 

escape, the single exception being the bearer of the 
colors, who was hit in the eye by a splinter of wood. 

As the Russians came closer, they continued to 
fire and the Japanese under Gilbert answered them. 
Those outside were entirely unprotected, but ev- 
idently thought to take the warehouse by sheer force 
of numbers. 

“ Gilbert, they have now surrounded us com- 
pletely, ’’ announced Ben, after an investigation. 
“ We’re in a bad hole and no mistake.” 

“ Well, we’ve got to fight our way out — it’s the 
only thing to do.” 

“ You’ll not surrender? ” 

“ No — at least, not yet,” was the firm reply. 

The Russians had now halted, and they saw an 
officer of one regiment consult with the leading 
officer of another. Evidently they were planning 
their attack. Then came another rush, followed by 
' volleys from both sides. As the enemy came closer, 
the bullets from the heavy rifles flew directly 
through the sides of the warehouse, sending the 
splinters in all directions. 

It was a time of dire peril, and though the Japa- 
nese kept up a gallant firing all felt that it was a use- 
less struggle and that, if they did not surrender, they 
would be cut down to a man. Many looked in- 
quiringly at Gilbert. 


i 5 6 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The young Southerner had gone up a ladder to 
the top of the warehouse. From a hole in the 
dilapidated roof he could make out a Japanese force 
at a distance. Oh, if that force would only come to 
their rescue! 

As he meditated he saw the troops make a sharp 
wheel and come forward on the double quick. At 
the same moment a company of sharpshooters 
located in a building far to the eastward also came 
out on the plain and advanced in open skirmish 
order, firing as they ran. Then — and Gilbert could 
scarcely believe his eyes— he saw some Japanese 
cavalry galloping over a distant hill and a battery 
wheeling into action almost behind the Russians in 
front ! 

“ Hurrah ! ” he shouted loudly. “ Fight on, 
men! ” he said, in Japanese. “ Fight on! Help is 
coming! We shall win the day. Banzai Nippon!” 

“ Help coming? ” queried Ben. 

“ Yes. Instead of being surrounded, our troops 
are surrounding the Russians. They are hemmed 
in ! They cannot escape ! ” 

It would have been useless to say more, for the 
rattle of musketry seconded by the thunder of the 
distant battery drowned out every other sound. The 
Russians had been charging on the old warehouse, 
now they paused in bewilderment, as men in the 



The Japanese cavalry dashed up on a mad gallop. — Page 157. 




SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY 1 57 

rear ranks began to fall. Then a shell added to 
their consternation and confusion. 

“ The enemy is coming up from behind — we have 
been led into a trap by the Japanese dogs ! ” was the 
cry. “We must turn and flee, ere it is too late! ” 

“ See, see, Gilbert ! ” called out Ben. “ The 
sharpshooters, and Casey and Stummer in the front ! 
They are cutting off the Russians and killing off 
the officers by the dozen! And look at the work 
yonder battery is doing! We are surely saved ! ” 
“Yes, Ben, and thank God for it!” answered 
Gilbert, and spoke from the depths of a full heart. 
Only five minutes before he had had a vision of sur- 
rendering and of being marched off to a Russian 
prison camp. 

The din was now terrific, and as the Japanese 
forces came closer, the Russians were literally 
hemmed in on all sides. Realizing their situation 
some few threw down their arms and surrendered, 
but the others fought on as never before. 

“ For the Czar ! For the blessed Emperor ! ” was 
their cry. “ Down with the Japanese pigs ! ” And 
then they went at it in a hand-to-hand fashion as 
fascinating as it was deadly. One detachment was 
fighting thus when the Japanese cavalry dashed up 
on a mad gallop and actually rode over at least fifty 
men, bruising and killing them in the mad charge. 


158 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


From the shelter of the warehouse, the soldiers 
under Gilbert continued to fire on the Russians, who 
had now turned and were trying to flee. All of the 
enemy were headed northward, in the direction of 
the railroad, fearing that even in Mukden they 
would no longer be safe. One report among the 
Russians had it that the city had already fallen but 
this was not strictly true, although some Japanese 
troops were now within gunshot and the defenders 
of the place were holding themselves in readiness to 
leave at a moment’s notice. Along the railroad the 
tracks were torn up, and the Russians had placed 
dynamite at various places, to be set off when the 
Mikado’s troops were near. 

The sharpshooters were the first to reach the old 
warehouse, and as they came up Gilbert ordered his 
command into the open to join them. 

“ Sure an’ is it you? ” came from Dan Casey, as 
he rushed up to the young Southerner. “We 
thought it might be the University Corps, but we 
wasn’t sure av it.” 

“ You have done a great service, Dan ! ” cried 
Gilbert warmly. 

“ Come on after dem Roossians ! ” came from 
Carl Stummer, and with a wave of a hand at Ben 
and Gilbert, he ran off with his Irish friend at his 
heels. The sharpshooters were a hundred strong, 


SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY 1 59 

and what they did in the battles against the Russians 
— picking off officers and gunners — history has al- 
ready related. In one contest all of the officers of a 
regiment were either seriously wounded or killed by 
these experts of the rifle, while in another battle 
nearly every gunner belonging to a Siberian battery 
was shot down, so that the cannon could be used 
only under tremendous disadvantages. 

The fighting all along the line had now broken 
forth in redoubled fury. The Japanese Generals, 
Oku and Nodzu, were driving a wedge straight into 
the Russian lines, and nothing that the Czar’s fol- 
lowers could do could stop them. At the same 
time General Nogi continued to hammer on the west 
with all his might, and never had the veterans of the 
campaign against Port Arthur done more effective 
work. From village to village and hut to hut they 
fought on, taking all that came within their grasp 
and giving nothing. Battery after battery was 
captured and hundreds of prisoners of war were 
compelled to march to the rear. It was one of the 
turning points of the war — the final great battle on 
land between Russia and Japan. 

Relieved from their perilous position at the old 
warehouse, Gilbert’s command was again ordered to 
the front, and spent that night three miles from 
where the battle had started in the morning. It was 


160 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

cold and raw and to get rations of any kind was dif- 
ficult. Ben discovered, in a hut, a bag of beans and 
another of rice, and of these a soup was made which 
was both refreshing and nourishing. Towards 
morning some of the men came in with an ox that 
had been captured on a neighboring Chinese farm 
and this was cut up and divided among the soldiers 
in that vicinity, who cooked or boiled the meat, as 
suited their tastes. 

At sunrise came the welcome news that Mukden 
had really fallen and that the Russian combined 
army was in full retreat. But while this was true, 
Kuropatkin left a strong rear guard in the vicinity 
of the railroad to harass the Japanese as much as 
possible. As the Czar’s followers retreated they 
devastated the country completely, burning up 
everything that they could not carry along. 

One of the greatest battles in the world’s history 
had been fought and victory had perched upon the 
emblem of the Mikado. In this tremendous conflict 
nearly eight hundred thousand men had taken part, 
besides scores of batteries of light and heavy artil- 
lery. The battle, or rather series of battles, had 
lasted from February 23 to March 10, 1905, with 
skirmishes before that date and other skirmishes still 
to follow. In killed and wounded the Japanese had 
lost over fifty thousand men and the Russians nearly 


SURROUNDED BY THE ENEMY l6l 

one hundred thousand men. Field Marshal Oyama 
had played a bold and daring game and had won, 
and those who had criticised him in the past now 
praised him to the utmost. On the other hand, 
General Kuropatkin was severely condemned for not 
having held his own, and soon after was made to 
resign his place as commander-in-chief, Linevitch 
being placed in the position and Kuropatkin taking 
the place left vacant by his brother officer. 

The results of this battle were twofold — and one 
result was, to Japan, just as important as the other. 
Beaten back and thoroughly disorganized, it was 
impossible for the Russian army to make another 
effective stand against the sons of Nippon, and they 
continued to flee northward, scarcely knowing 
where to go or what to do next. For the time be- 
ing Japan was absolute master of the situation on 
land. 

The other result to Japan’s credit concerned that 
country financially. At the outbreak of the war 
much money had been needed by the government 
and this had been raised by “ home loans ” as they 
were termed. But then came a time when Japan 
had to borrow from outsiders. The people of the 
United States took Japanese securities readily, but 
Europe shrugged its shoulders and demanded a high 
rate of interest. While the fate of the armies still 


1 62 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

hung in the balance Japan could get but little money 
in Europe ; now, however, all changed, and the 
rich bankers crowded forward, offering all the 
money that was needed. It was only another illus- 
tration of the old saying that “ nothing succeeds like 
success/’ As the financial resources of Japan ex- 
panded, the Russian money market grew corre- 
spondingly tight. Many thought it was time for 
Russia to sue for peace, but as yet the Czar did not 
see the matter in that light. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


ODD NEWS FROM AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 

“ Ben, we are to enter Mukden, and at once ! ” 

It was Gilbert who brought the news on ‘the fol- 
lowing morning, after a consultation with one of his 
superiors. 

“ Are we to go alone?” questioned Ben curiously. 

“ Hardly ! ” The young Southerner gave a short 
laugh. “ Two or three regiments are going. We 
must do some sort of guard duty — what depends 
upon how we find things when we get there.” 

Cold and cramped from a night in the open, the 
special command moved forward a little later, along 
one of the highways leading into the walled city of 
Mukden. Afar off arose a heavy smoke, coming 
from what was called the railroad settlement. 
Sheds, warehouses, and offices were in flames. 

As they advanced they saw the evidences of the 
Russian flight before them — spiked cannon, broken- 
down carts and wagons, heaps of half-burnt sup- 
plies, riderless horses, many of them suffering from 
wounds of shot or shell. The Chinese natives had 


163 


164 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

fled in xiorror, but now they came timidly forth from 
their shelters, kotowing over and over again and 
begging the victors to be their friends. At one spot 
they came on a sutler’s tent, wrecked and looted, and 
beside a half-empty liquor cask six Russian soldiers, 
all intoxicated. 

“ That’s the curse of the Russian army,” observed 
Ben, looking at the besotted men. “ They must 
have their vodka , or some other liquor, all the time.” 

“ Right you are, Ben. It’s a wonder the officers 
allow the men to indulge themselves.” 

“ Perhaps they can’t help themselves. You can’t 
stop a whole army from drinking in a day.” 

As they neared Mukden they saw the smoke aris- 
ing from half a dozen buildings of importance. The 
inhabitants were doing their best to put out the fires, 
fearing a general conflagration. The confusion 
was indescribable — as great as that witnessed by 
the young Americans at Port Arthur — and they 
stared in wonder. 

Soon came orders to march to the north end of the 
city and guard a certain street running parallel with 
the wall. Orders were given out that looting should 
not be tolerated and that the inhabitants should be 
protected. 

Having stationed their companies to the best ad- 
vantage, Gilbert and Ben gave their wounds atten- 


ODD NEWS FROM AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 165 

tion and looked after the comforts of their injured 
men. Major Okopa had been taken to the hospital 
and there was no telling when he would get around 
again. 

“ It’s certainly hard on the major,” was Gilbert’s 
comment. “ Right on the eve of our great victory, 
too.” 

“ It places you in a responsible position,” 
answered Ben. “ You are now really our major.” 

“ That is true, but I’d rather have Major Okopa 
here than fill his place, Ben.” 

The day was full of excitement. The soldiers of 
the special command had two fires to put out, and 
caught several Chinamen who were looting the 
house of an old lady, who screamed lustily for help 
when she saw her things being carted away. When 
Gilbert appeared on the scene the old lady ran up 
and clung to his arm, begging him for assistance. 

“ They shall not harm you,” said the young 
Southerner, and made the looters put everything 
back. Then he placed the rascals under arrest. 
They protested vigorously, but he shook his head 
and would not listen to them. 

“ The fight is over, so far as Mukden is con- 
cerned,” he said. “ You have got to behave your- 
selves.” 

That night, in the darkness, some Russians, who 


1 66 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


had secreted themselves in several cellars of the city, 
tried to escape past the Japanese guards. All told, 
there were over a hundred of the fellows, some sol- 
diers and others hangers-on of the army, and all 
heavily armed. 

“ Here’s work ! ” cried Gilbert, and ordered his 
command to do what it could to round the Russians 
up. This brought on a lively skirmish, in which 
several were shot down. 

In the midst of the melee Gilbert found himself 
with about twenty men guarding the end of a long 
lane down which fully fifty of the Russians were 
heading. He ordered his men to fire, and at the 
volley the enemy turned and fled through a side lane. 
Here they were headed off once more, and in the end 
were compelled to throw down their arms and sur- 
render. 

In the very thickest of the fracas Gilbert saw a 
man go down, shot through the leg. As he fell a 
Japanese soldier ran up to bayonet him through the 
heart. 

“ Stop ! For the love of heaven stop ! ” roared 
the Russian. “ I surrender ! Do not kill me, I 
beseech you ! ” 

There was something about the man and his voice 
which seemed familiar to the young Southerner, and 
he ran up hastily, while the Japanese soldier still 


ODD NEWS FROM AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 1 6f 

held his bayonet at the fellow’s heart, undecided 
whether to kill him or listen to his appeal. 

“ Let him live ! ” called out Gilbert, and the bay- 
onet was withdrawn. “ So, Ivan Snokoff, we meet 
again.” 

“ Captain Pennington ! ” was the gasped-out 
answer, and the man on the ground stared in amaze- 
ment. “ It is — I must be dreaming! ” 

“ No, you are not dreaming, Ivan Snokoff. I 
thought we’d meet again, but not so soon.” 

“ Save me ! ” whined the Russian. “ Save me ! 
Do not let them kill me ! ” 

“ Are you wounded ? ” 

“ Yes — a bullet in my leg. Oh, but this has been 
a black time for me! I have lost my all — every 
ruble is gone. I am a beggar — and now this! It 
is too much ! ” 

Gilbert took a closer look at the man who had 
once swindled him and the Richmond Importing 
Company. Snokoff was in rags, and his face was 
lean and haggard. Evidently he was telling the 
truth when he said he was a beggar, for even the 
pockets of his clothing were full of holes. 

The acting major of the special command called 
two of his soldiers. 

“ Carry him into yonder house and place him on a 
bed,” he said, and his orders were promptly obeyed. 


68 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Then one soldier was placed on guard, that Ivan 
Snokoff might not get away. 

“ He may try to bribe you to let him go,” said 
Gilbert, to the soldier. “ Beware of him ! ” And 
he gave his man a look that meant much. 

“ I am not to be bribed, Captain,” was the prompt 
answer. 

After this Gilbert returned to the lane, and did 
what he could to round up the escaping Russians. 
The work took his time until late in the morning, 
and it was not until noon that he called upon Ivan 
Snokoff, accompanied by Ben. 

The broken-down merchant was propped up in 
bed, and a Japanese surgeon had dropped in by Gil- 
bert’s order and given the wounded limb attention. 
Snokoff looked the picture of misery and suffering 
and both of the young Americans could not help but 
pity him. 

“ You have come to gloat over me, not so? ” said 
the Russian, with a black look at them. “ Have 
your way. I am the defeated one — even as our 
noble army has been defeated.” 

“ I don’t wish to gloat over anybody, Snokoff,” 
answered Gilbert, kindly. “ That is not my style. 
Did the doctor fix you up ? ” 

“ Yes.” 


“ You can’t walk? ” 


ODD NEWS FROM AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 169 

“ No. He said I would have to be taken to the 
hospital on a stretcher.” The sufferer heaved a 
sigh. “ A Japanese hospital ! They will serve me 
well there — most likely saw the leg off ! ” 

“ Not unless it is necessary. They are not such 
butchers as you imagine. On the contrary, I think 
our hospital service is better than the Russian ser- 
vice has been.” 

“ When a man is poor — without a single 
kopeck ” 

“ All patients are treated alike. But if you wish, 
I’ll say a good word for you. You don’t deserve it, 
but still ” 

“ Will you say a good word — just one — it might 
help — I did not mean to harm you — it was all a mis- 
take, Captain Pennington, all a mistake.” Ivan 
Snokoff looked at Gilbert eagerly. It was like a 
drowning man clinging to a straw. 

“ I’ll speak a good word for you, and give you a 
little money, too, if you’ll tell me your whole story,” 
answered the young Southerner. He saw that Ivan 
Snokoff was completely broken down and willing to 
do anything to help himself. 

“ My story — yes, you shall have it from beginning 
to end,” was the ready answer, and having been 
given something to eat and drink the wounded man 
told his tale, going into many details which need not 


170 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

be related here. He told how he had invested his 
money in the ship sent to Port Arthur, and how the 
transaction had been a total loss to him, and then he 
related how he had lost some money belonging to 
Captain Barusky and how, later, the Russian officer 
had tried to swindle him. 

“ And where is Barusky now ? ” asked Ben. 

“ Where? A wanderer on the face of the earth. 
He has deserted from the army and his whole family 
has cast him off. They do not want to see him 
again, and I doubt if he ever puts foot on Russian 
soil in the future.” 

“ So much the better for Russia,” said Gilbert 
dryly. “ I never want to see him again.” 

“ Nor I,” returned Ben. 

“ Snokoff,” resumed Gilbert after a pause, “ you 
knew Mr. Chase, of the Anglo-Chinese Company? ” 

“ That I did — a fine man.” 

“ Did you know Olaf Pallak, with whom Mr. 
Chase had certain dealings ? ” 

“ I knew him, but not well.” 

“ When did you see him, or hear of him last? ” 
persisted Gilbert. 

“ See him ? I saw him here in Mukden less than 
a week ago.” 

“ In Mukden ! ” cried Gilbert and Ben simultane- 
ously. 


ODD NEWS FROM AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 1 7 1 

“ Yes. He was here with a fellow who works for 
him, a Cossack named Boschnoff.” 

“ Is he here now? ” went on Gilbert excitedly. 

“How can I tell that? Most likely not, for he 
was not with those that tried to escape last night.” 

“ Then you think he went when the army did? ” 

“ Yes, or before. But why do you ask about 
him?” 

“ I must find him if I possibly can. Mr. Chase 
is missing and Olaf Pallak is responsible for his dis- 
appearance.” 

“ Ha, now I know something ! ” cried Ivan 
Snokoff and his eyes lit up for a moment. “ It was 
a mystery before.” 

“ What do you know ? ” 

“ I know ” The Russian paused. “ If I tell 

you, will you help me? I do not ask for much. 
Kind treatment in the hospital, that is all, and per- 
haps a few rubles , to grease the hands of the attend- 
ants, that they may bring me something fit to eat.” 

“ You shall have the rubles , and the best treat- 
ment I can obtain for you — if you will aid us to find 
Pallak.” 

“ I cannot tell much, but I can tell something. 
Pallak has a brother, a sea captain who owns a ship 
of some kind. He was here in Mukden and they 
talked together. I heard them. They both said the 


172 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


ship would come in handy for the work — that all 
would be well after the ship was away from the 
shore.” 

“ A ship ! ” repeated Gilbert. 

“ I think I know what that means,” burst out Ben. 
“ They planned to carry Nathan Chase off to sea 
and hold him on shipboard until they could obtain a 
ransom ! ” 


CHAPTER XIX 


AN IMPORTANT CAPTURE 

“ Perhaps you are right, Ben,” said Gilbert, after 
a pause. “ They might think they would be safer 
from pursuit on the sea than on land. If the ship 
was searched they could readily get Mr. Chase out 
of sight.” 

“ What was the name of the ship ? ” questioned 
Ben, turning again to Ivan Snokoff. 

“ I did not hear the name — but it may be that 
somebody in this city can tell you what ship Captain 
Pallak commands,” was the answer. 

“You have seen nothing of Mr. Chase ?” con- 
tinued Gilbert. 

“ No.” 

“ Where did Olaf Pallak keep himself while he 
was here ? ” 

The broken-down Russian merchant had no 
hesitation about describing the place, which proved 
to be a hotel of the ordinary class, known by the 
flowery name of Red Roses. But the hotel was now 
locked up, and the windows boarded, and the two 


173 


174 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


watchmen in charge could tell nothing about either 
Pallak or Boschnoff. 

“ Well, we have learned something,” was Gil- 
bert’s comment, after the hotel had been visited, and 
also several places near-by. “ Those rascals have 
been here, and most likely they went off with this 
Captain Pallak. The question is: Did they take 
Nathan Chase with them? ” 

“ They must have done so, if he was with them 
when they arrived at Mukden.” 

“ How could they bring him into such a city as 
this without attracting the attention of the guard ? ” 
“ That would be easy. If they had a covered 
wagon they could pose as sutlers and place Mr. 
Chase in the wagon, bound and gagged. Then 
again, it may be that they didn’t bring him here, but 
took him to the coast from their camping place in 
the mountains. It’s a puzzle.” 

Ivan Snokoff was certainly broken in spirits, and 
that night he grew physically worse. Gilbert gave 
him five rubles in change, and saw to it that he was 
made comfortable at one of the hospitals. It may 
be added here that the Russian recovered only after 
a long illness and was lame for life. He had learned 
a bitter lesson that he never forgot. 

The Russian army had retreated to Tie-ling and 
to other points along or near the railroad. The re- 


AN IMPORTANT CAPTURE 


175 


treat was accomplished under tremendous dif- 
ficulties, the few roads being more than crowded 
with wagons, cannon, cavalry, and infantry. In 
some places open fights took place as to who should 
have the right of way. One of the bridges of the 
river was down, and here, while fording the stream, 
a number of horses and several drivers were 
drowned. Terror had seized thousands and all they 
thought of was getting away, regardless of the 
rights of those around them. In this flight many 
soldiers threw away everything they had but the 
clothing on their backs, and the Japanese picked up 
thousands of guns, cartridges, belts, blankets, great- 
coats, as well as cooking utensils, rations, and purely 
personal belongings, including pocket combs, razors, 
and looking-glasses. 

To the northward of Mukden the smoke hung 
heavily for many days. Where anything had to be 
left behind, an attempt to burn it was made, and not 
a building of any sort but was razed. The Chinese 
who lived in that neighborhood were frantic to see 
their possessions destroyed, but the Russians paid no 
attention to them. 

“ To leave anything would be to aid the dogs of 
Nippon ! ” they declared. “ When the dogs come, 
let them settle with you ! ” And the Russians 
moved on. As it was still winter, many of the 


1 76 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


poorer class of Celestials almost starved to death for 
the want of food. They heartily wished the war 
was over, but could do nothing to bring the conflict 
to an end. 

For the time being a portion of the Japanese army 
remained at or near Mukden. This was necessary, 
both to give the men a rest and to take care of the 
great number of killed and wounded and also to 
look after the thousands of prisoners. Later it was 
announced that a number of prisoners would be 
marched to the coast, and that the University Corps 
would act as a guard. 

“ We are off again to-morrow,” said Gilbert, when 
he had interviewed one of his superiors. “ A long 
tramp at that, Ben.” 

“ Where to?” 

“ The coast. For the present we are to be turned 
into a prisoners’ guard.” 

“ Then we won’t see much fighting.” 

“ Not unless the prisoners try to give us trouble,” 
was the reply. 

“ They can’t do much, as they will be unarmed 
and perhaps linked together.” 

Getting the prisoners into shape to be moved was 
no easy task, and the start for the coast was not 
made until the middle of the afternoon. The Rus- 
sians grumbled loudly but it availed them nothing. 


AN IMPORTANT CAPTURE 


1 77 

One boyish-looking fellow shed tears at the thought 
of going to a Japanese prison. 

“ I did not wish to join the army — I was forced 
to fight/’ he said. “I want to go home!” His 
companions laughed at him, and one struck him 
across the mouth and told him to hold his tongue 
and not disgrace his Emperor. 

“ I suppose a - good many of them have been 
forced into the army,” said Ben to his chum. 
“ That’s the disadvantage of living in a country 
where the ruler is a despot.” 

“ Perhaps Czar Nicholas won’t be a despot many 
more years, Ben. The Russians are getting too en- 
lightened for that sort of thing. Even as it is, this 
war away from home has caused all sorts of troubles 
in the mother country, and in Poland and Finland.” 

“ It’s a shame to make some of the peasants fight. 
Why, in that last big battle we had some of them 
who hardly know how to use their rifles. Our own 
men can fire three times to their once.” 

All told, the prisoners numbered about one thou- 
sand. As they marched off they were completely 
surrounded by the Japanese guard, with fixed bay- 
onets. On the following day another batch of 
prisoners left, and this kept up day after day until 
all were disposed of, the parties going to a dozen dif- 
ferent places. 


178 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Spring was now at hand and the roads were a 
mass of slush and mud, making traveling anything 
but pleasant. The ice had broken in the rivers and 
in the low spots the banks of the streams overflowed 
for miles. As far as it could, the party kept to the 
high ground. 

“ How long is this march to the coast going to 
take ? ” asked Ben, after several days had past. 

“ Depends upon what sort of roads are ahead, 
Ben,” answered the acting major. “ This is a lit- 
tle more of the hard work that goes with a military 
campaign.” 

“ Right you are.” Ben stretched himself. “ Well, 
one comfort, we haven’t got the enemy ahead of 
us.” 

“ Don’t be too sure of that.” 

“ Why, do you imagine there are any Russians 
in this vicinity ? ” 

“ I don’t know. It’s a new country to me.” 

On the following day they fell in with a portion of 
the army from the Yalu and learned that the vicinity 
to the northward still held a few detached Russian 
commands. 

“ We are trying our best to root them out,” said 
the officer who vouchsafed this information. “ Still, 
you had better march to the southward if you wish 
to avoid them,” and this was done. 


AN IMPORTANT CAPTURE 


179 


For a week the weather remained fine, but then a 
rain set in, lasting several days. The roads became 
almost impassable, and Gilbert ordered his men into 
camp. The Russians were glad to stop and made 
themselves as comfortable as they could. 

They were now within a day’s march of the coast, 
although fifty miles from where the prisoners were 
to be taken. So far there had been no trouble, but 
now Ben saw certain signs which caused him to 
grow distrustful. 

“ I don’t like the way those Russians are acting,” 
said he to his chum. “ It looks to me as if they 
were plotting to break away.” 

“ I’ll tell the men to be extra careful,” answered 
Gilbert. 

The outbreak came that night, which was dark 
and blustery. Two of the Japanese guards were 
knocked down and their guns taken from them. 
Then came a few shots, and fully fifty of the pris- 
oners started down a side road leading to some 
distant hills. 

“ To your posts ! ” shouted Gilbert, rushing from 
his tent, where he had been on the point of retiring. 
“ Shoot down every man who attempts to get 
away ! ” 

Ben was already out and so were the other of- 
ficers, and soon the remaining prisoners were cowed 


l8o UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

into submission. Then a detachment of sixty men, 
led by Gilbert and Ben, hurried off in the darkness 
after the fugitives. 

In less than an hour over forty of the men who 
had gotten away were retaken and placed under a 
guard of half that number. The others continued 
the hunt, Ben leading one detachment and Gilbert 
another. 

It was not until daylight that Gilbert succeeded 
in getting on the trail of six other prisoners. One 
man was shot down, and then the rest surrendered 
and submitted to having their hands bound behind 
them. 

A short distance further up the road was a lonely 
farmhouse, with several barns and other outbuild- 
ings. Thinking some of the prisoners had gone 
there, Gilbert advanced on the place with his de- 
tachment. A man was found in one of the barns, 
hiding under some loose hay, while another had let 
himself down into a well by the bucket rope. 

“ Come out of that ! ” ordered Gilbert, and pointed 
his pistol at the man in the well, and although the 
Russian did not understand the words he understood 
the meaning of the pointed pistol and came up in a 
great hurry, falling on his knees as soon as he 
emerged and begging for mercy. 

As soon as all the outstanding buildings had been 


AN IMPORTANT CAPTURE l8l 

thoroughly searched Gilbert ordered an advance 
upon the farmhouse. The Chinamen were in pos- 
session and they vowed that no Russian had entered, 
adding that they had been on guard as soon as they 
heard the distant firing. 

“ We’ll take a look around, nevertheless,” said 
Gilbert. “ Perhaps some of the rascals got in with- 
out your knowing it.” 

The Celestials protested warmly, but when Gilbert 
ordered them aside and raised his sword, they fell 
back in a hurry. Then the acting major stepped 
inside, followed by a handful of his men. 

“ I want no treachery,” he said to the Chinamen. 
“ If you make any trouble, I’ll have you shot on the 
spot.” 

Two rooms of the farmhouse were thoroughly 
searched and no trace of any Russians could be 
found. Then Gilbert came to a third room and 
found the door closed and fastened. 

“ I want this opened,” said the young American, 
and as the Chinamen could not unfasten the bar- 
rier he put his shoulder to the door and forced 
it in. 

At first he saw nobody in the apartment. Then 
came a slight rustle of a curtain in a corner. 

“ Come out of that! ” he called. “ Come out, or 
I will shoot ! ” And he raised his pistol. 


182 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Do not shoot ! Do not shoot ! ” came in a 
trembling Russian voice. “ Do not shoot, I beg ! I 
will come out ! ” 

And then the curtain was thrust aside and out 
into the room stepped Olaf Pallak’s tool, BoschnofT ! 


CHAPTER XX 


CARRIED OFF BY THE ENEMY 

The surprise was complete on both sides, for Gil- 
bert had not expected to see his enemy nor had 
Boschnoff imagined it was anybody but a Japanese 
officer who was after him. 

“ Do not shoot ! ” continued the Cossack, his face 
paling slightly when he recognized the young 
Southerner. 

“ So it is you!” ejaculated Gilbert. “ This is 
better luck than I expected.’' 

To this Boschnoff did not reply. He was looking 
straight into the muzzle of the young officer’s 
weapon and it was far from a pleasant sensation. In 
his heart he felt that Gilbert had a right to shoot him 
down where he stood. 

“ Step out here, where I can get a good look at 
you,” went on the young Southerner. And then he 
added hastily: “ Is Olaf Pallak here, too? ” 

“ No.” 

“ Where is he?” 

“ I — I do not know,” came hesitatingly. 

183 


1 84 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

BoschnofFs manner made Gilbert suspicious and 
he came a step nearer and placed his pistol almost 
at the Cossack’s temple. 

“ I want a direct answer, Boschnoff,” he con- 
tinued, in the best Russian he could muster, for the 
fellow understood little else. “Where is he? I 
know you and he were together in Mukden, and that 
you have secreted Nathan Chase in some place.” 

“ You — you make a mistake, Captain — I 

I ” 

“ You cannot fool me again, Boschnoff. You 
are a scoundrel and unless you tell me the truth — ” 
Gilbert thrust his pistol a little closer to the fellow. 

At this the nerve of the wretch completely 
deserted him and he fell on his knees, wringing his 
hands piteously. 

‘ Do not shoot ! For the sake of my wife and 
children I beg of you! I am a poor man, sire! 
I 1 ” 

“ Then answer me. Where is Olaf Pallak ? ” 

“He has gone — to the seacoast.” 

“ With his brother, the sea captain? ” 

“ Ha ! you know his brother ? ” 

“ Answer me.” 

“ Yes, with his brother — and with others who 
are strangers to me.” 

“ Did they have Nathan Chase with them? ” 


CARRIED OFF BY THE ENEMY 185 

“ That I know not.” 

“Where is Captain Pallak’ s ship?” 

“ Close to Chen-Heng harbor.” 

“And what is the name of his ship? Tell me 
truthfully, or it shall surely go hard with you.” 

“ ’Tis the Krimetz. She sails under the flag of 
Germany, but she is a Russian ship and Captain 
Pallak is in command.” 

“ Where is she bound? ” 

“ That I know not. You see, it was this way : I 
wanted money and Olaf Pallak would not give it to 
me. I told him I would not work for nothing, and 
then he cast me off. We had a quarrel.” 

“ How long ago since he was here? ” 

“ Last night, he and four others.” 

“ Did they mention Nathan Chase? ” 

“ They did, but not to me and I could not hear 
exactly what was said. As soon as they heard some 
Japanese troops were in this vicinity they went off, 
leaving me alone. I thought I could escape to the 

Russian lines, but now ” Boschnoff finished 

with a mountainous sigh. 

At this moment there was a commotion outside, 
and Ben appeared. 

“ Had a little luck, I see,” he cried out. “ We 
have rounded up the rest of the prisoners.” 

“ All of them, Ben?” 


86 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ All but one and he offered such a fight that one 
of our men shot him down. We — hullo, that Cos- 
sack, eh ? ” 

“ Yes,” and Gilbert told his chum of what Bosch- 
noff had said. 

“ We ought to get down to the seacoast without 
delay, Gilbert, and see if we can succeed in locating 
the Krimetz.” , 

“ I agree, but we have got to look after the pris- 
oners first. We’ll have to watch them closer than 
ever, after this fracas.” 

The matter was talked over at some length, and it 
was not until morning that those who had escaped 
were taken back to the regular camp. With the 
party went Boschnoff, who was closely guarded by 
Gilbert’s special order. 

It was not until three days later that the prisoners 
were turned over to the regular prison guard of the 
Japanese army, and Gilbert and Ben found them- 
selves free to make a hunt for the Krimetz and Olaf 
Pallak and his tools. The special command was left 
in charge of the next highest officer, and Ben and 
Gilbert set off alone for the seacoast town of Chen- 
Heng, a place of small importance but one possess- 
ing a fairly good harbor. 

“ If we can locate this ship, what do you think 
ought to be our next move ? ” said Ben, as they 


CARRIED OFF BY THE ENEMY 187 

journeyed along on a couple of horses they had 
hired. 

“ Notify any Japanese warship that may be at 
hand, or else the Japanese authorities on shore, Ben. 
Most likely there’ll be a destroyer or two in the 
harbor, on the lookout for Russian warships.” 

“ I hope we locate the ship and seize Pallak. I’m 
almost certain we’ll find Mr. Chase aboard.” 

“ More than likely.” 

At length they reached the seaport and took the 
horses around to a stable at which they had agreed 
to leave the animals. Then they made several 
inquiries and ascertained that no Japanese warships 
were in that vicinity but a small coast guard was 
located at a tumbled-down fort near the northern 
outskirt. 

“ Let us take a look at the shipping,” suggested 
Ben, and they made their way down to the few docks 
of which Chen-Heng boasted. Here they discovered 
several ships lying at a distance, but could not make 
out their names. 

“ Let us hire a small boat,” said Gilbert, and they 
had no trouble in doing this. It was rather a 
clumsy affair, but this they did not mind, for the 
distance to be covered was not great. 

“We ought to have Larry here to do the rowing 
for us,” said Gilbert, as he and Ben seated them- 


88 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


selves at the sweeps. “ I know he’s first-class at 
this sort of thing.” 

“ I’d like to hear from Larry,” returned Ben. “ I 
wonder if he has seen any fighting since he joined 
his ship? ” 

“ I doubt it, Ben. The Russians haven’t many 
ships left in these waters, since the fighting around 
Port Arthur harbor. They’ll have to send out some 
more ships from Russian waters.” 

It had been clear, but now it began to cloud over 
and look like rain. As well as they were able, they 
rowed out to the first ship and around that to the 
next, and then to a third. 

“ These outlandish names are more than I can 
pronounce,” said Ben. “ And the Chinese is like 
so much Sanskrit to me.” 

“ There is a vessel over yonder that may be the 
one we are after,” returned Gilbert, a moment later. 
“ Come on ! ” And they pulled away as quickly as 
the heavy sweeps would permit. 

As they neared the vessel a soft rain began to fall 
and the sky grew steadily darker. At first they 
could not make out the name of the craft and had to 
row close to the stern for that purpose. 

“ The Krimetz! ” cried Gilbert. “ And the name 
is in German, just as Boschnoff said. Ben, we are 
on the right track at last ! ” 


CARRIED OFF BY THE ENEMY 


“ Shall we go on board ? ” 

“ It wouldn’t be safe for us to do so alone. The 
best thing for us to do is to row back to shore and 
get help from that old fort.” 

“ Very well. Better hurry up; the ship may sail.” 

“ No, there are no signs of her sailing for the 
present. The anchors are both down and hardly 
anybody is on deck.” 

Without delay they turned their small boat 
around and started back for the shore. It was now 
raining steadily and a thick mist was creeping up 
from the sea. 

“ I hope we don’t have any trouble in getting as- 
sistance,” went on Gilbert anxiously. “ Some of 
these Japanese officers are peculiar about lending a 
hand, especially to a foreigner.” 

“ They can’t refuse us, after they hear the story 
we have to tell,” said Ben confidently. 

They were still some, distance from the docks 
when they saw four men rush down to the water’s 
edge, drop into a big rowboat, and begin to pull 
away as hard as they could. The rowboat was 
headed directly for their own craft. 

“Hullo! something is wrong!” cried Ben. 
“ Those men are coming this way ! ” 

“ Look out there ! ” sang out Gilbert. “ Don’t 
run us down ! Look out ! ” 


190 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Whether his cry was heard or not they could not 
tell. The men were greatly excited and pulled away 
madly. Before the young Americans could get out 
of the way the two boats came together with a crash, 
and Ben and Gilbert were hurled into the waters of 
the harbor. 

“We’ve struck another boat!” said one of the 
men, in dismay. He spoke in Russian. 

“Never mind; go on,” growled another. “We 
have no time to waste. If they have found us 
out ” 

“ But we can’t leave them to drown,” put in a 
third. “ We might ” 

“As I live, look!” ejaculated the second man 
who had spoken. 

“ What is it, Olaf ? ” 

“ What is it ? Those Americans I have told you 
about ! ” 

“ The Americans ? How came they here? ” 

“ I know not, Stephen. But they are here ! It 
is most wonderful ! ” 

By this time Gilbert and Ben had emerged from 
their involuntary ducking and were striking out in 
an endeavor to keep from drowning. The water 
was cold and chilled them thoroughly. 

“ Let us take them along,” were the first words 
they heard, spoken in the voice of Olaf Pallak. 


CARRIED OFF BY THE ENEMY 191 

“Along?” queried Stephen Pallak, his brother, 
who was the captain of the Krimetz. 

“ Yes. Why not? We can put them along with 
that other American and make a better thing than 
ever out of it,” urged Olaf Pallak. 

A few whispered words followed, and a moment 
later Ben and Gilbert found themselves dragged on 
board of the large rowboat. Then a struggle en- 
sued, in the midst of which Ben was struck on the 
head by a boat-hook and rendered unconscious. 
Then Gilbert was forced down and his hands were 
tied behind his back and his feet also secured. 

“ Now for the ship ; we have lost too much time,” 
said Captain Pallak. “ Row your best ! ” And he 
set the example. 

Before the ship was reached there was a commo- 
tion on the shore and a loud call in Japanese for 
them to stop. Then some shots were fired, but they 
took no effect. 

As soon as the Krimetz was gained, Ben and Gil- 
bert were taken to the deck and then hurried to 
a stateroom below. Here they were locked in 
and left to themselves. Ben was still dazed and 
the young Southerner did what he could for his 
chum. 

On deck all was, for the moment, in confusion. 
The anchors were hoisted and sails were set, and 


192 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


slowly the Krimetz moved out of the harbor and 
made for the open sea. Those on the shore at- 
tempted a pursuit in a launch, but soon the gather- 
ing mists hid the larger vessel completely from view 
and then the chase was abandoned. 


CHAPTER XXI 


LARRY AND HIS TRIALS 

“ Well, Luke, what do you make of this? ” 

It was Larry who spoke. He was standing on 
the extreme western coast of the rocky island upon 
which the Shohirika had been wrecked. As far as 
eye could reach the mighty sea rolled around them. 

A whole day and another night had been spent on 
the island by the castaways of the warship, and dur- 
ing that time, so far as officers and men knew, not 
a single sail of any kind had come into view. In 
the afternoon a few stores from the almost wholly 
submerged ship had been brought to shore, and that 
was all. 

“ It looks to me as if we were in a putty bad fix, 
Larry,” answered the old Yankee sailor. “ This 
ain’t no place at all to live on fer any length o’ time. 
Only a few trees an’ bushes, and nuthin at all in the 
shape o’ something to eat or drink. Unless we git 
more stuff from the ship, it won’t be long before we’ll 
all be starved to death.” 


193 


194 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Just what I’ve been thinking. Yet, I suppose 
we ought to be thankful that the Shohirika didn’t 
go down in the middle of the ocean.” 

“ Humph ! What’s the difference between bein’ 
drowned an’ bein’ starved to death? One’s a bit 
slower nor the other, that’s all,” added the old sailor 
dolefully. 

“ Oh, don’t get so blue ! ” cried Larry, trying to 
be cheerful. “ Help is bound to come, sooner or 
later.” 

“ Yes, and maybe it will be from a Russian war- 
ship, eh ? ” 

“ Oh, but you are blue, Luke. Perhaps one of the 
elegant ocean liners will come along — and then 
we’ll be able to live in clover for a while.” Larry’s 
eye gave a merry twinkle. “ Nothing like looking 
on the bright side of things, as the monkey said to 
the mirror.” 

Nevertheless, the young sailor felt almost as 
downcast as his old friend. Rations were scanty 
and even a good drink of water was impossible to 
obtain. Many of the men were growling loudly, 
and it looked as if there might be a mutiny. Some 
few wanted to eat all the rations at once, but the 
officers would not permit this. 

“ We must make the best of our situation,” said 
the captain of the Shohirika bravely. “ I think 


LARRY AND HIS TRIALS 1 95 

help will come soon. Remember you are still in the 
service of the Mikado.” 

That night it rained again, and, wet to the skin, 
the sailors felt more miserable than ever. Some 
had caught a heavy cold, and the ship surgeons had 
all they could do to attend to those on the sick list. 
It was certainly a trying time, and everybody won- 
dered how it would end. 

“ I know what I am going to do,” said Larry, on 
the morning following the soaking rain. “ I’m 
going to try fishing.” 

Not only Luke but also Stanford and some 
others were willing, and all took themselves to a 
spot where they thought the fish might bite. One 
sailor had some hooks, and they took twisted threads 
for lines and baited up in various ways. 

Two hours passed and only one fish was caught 
and that so small it was cut up for more bait. But 
about noon a shoal of the finny tribe seemed to 
sweep around the rocky island and then the sport 
became lively enough. 

“ Hurrah ! how’s that ? ” cried Larry, and landed 
a fish weighing at least two pounds. Then Luke 
brought in a catch twice that size and Stanford 
several little fellows. The good luck continued half 
the afternoon, until fourteen sailors who were in- 
dulging in the sport had cast on the rocks over a 


196 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

hundred and twenty catches weighing from half a 
pound to six pounds each. Then of a sudden the 
fishing dropped down to absolutely nothing once 
more. 

“ That’s a catch sure enough,” remarked Larry, 
watching the men who had started in to do the 
cleaning. “ We are not going to starve just yet.” 

The remarkable haul put everybody in a good 
humor. Over a large fire the fish were prepared in 
various ways, and both officers and sailors ate their 
fill and still had enough left for breakfast. 

While some of the men were Ashing others had 
explored the island and found a split in the rocks, 
leading to something of a hollow. This place was 
cleaned out, and rocks were placed over the top, 
making a rude shelter large enough to accommodate 
thirty or forty persons. Here the officers and a few 
gunners were housed, and another shelter was 
cleansed out for the other men. 

But taken at its best it was a dreary* time and of- 
ficers and men were much downcast, although 
many tried their best not to show it. A constant 
lookout was kept for a passing ship. Once a sail 
was seen in the distance. It was only a Chinese 
junk and soon passed out of sight. 

“ Never mind, that ship couldn’t have taken us 
off,” said Steve Colton. 


LARRY AND HIS TRIALS 


197 


“ No, but it might have carried a message for 
us,” answered Larry quickly. 

Sunday had passed quietly, and Luke and Larry 
were walking across the island on the following 
morning when they heard a shout from one of the 
lookouts. 

“ A ship ! ” was the cry. “ A big steamer, and 
coming this way ! ” 

The report was true, and soon the vessel could be 
seen by all. It was a warship, and when it came 
closer they saw that the craft belonged to the Japa- 
nese navy. 

A mighty shout went up and a signal of distress 
was quickly displayed. Those on the vessel looked 
in wonder at the many men on the rocky coast, wav- 
ing their arms frantically. But then the half-sub- 
merged wreck of the Shohirika explained the situa- 
tion. Soon the ship was close to the island and a 
small boat was sent ashore, manned by a dozen 
Japanese jackies and in charge of a lieutenant. 

The newly arrived ship proved to be the Shipoma, 
an auxiliary cruiser of the Mikado's navy which 
had, before the war, been in the merchant service 
between Nagasaki and Yokohama. The Shipoma 
carried two hundred men and a battery of no small 
calibre. 

A long conference took place between several 


198 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


officers, the upshot of which was that half of the 
officers and the men cast away on the rocky island 
were transferred to the auxiliary cruiser during the 
following morning. Provisions were sent ashore 
for those who remained behind and it was an- 
nounced that another ship would be sent to their 
rescue inside of three days. 

Larry and Luke were among, the fortunate ones 
to embark on the Shipoma and were soon made as 
comfortable on the ship as the limited quarters per- 
mitted. It was announced that the vessel would sail 
direct for the coast of Korea in order to leave word 
concerning those still on the island. Then the war- 
ship was to head for Nagasaki. 

“ This seems like living once more, ,, said Larry, 
after a day spent on shipboard. “ I declare, I’d 
rather fight the hardest sea battle than to be cast 
away like that again.” 

“ Ditto myself,” answered the Yankee tar. “ The 
poor Shohirika ! I was sorry, indeed, to see her go 
down ! ” 

“ So was I, Luke. What do you think they’ll do 
with us now ? ” 

“ Oh, shift us to some other vessel most likely. 
They need gunners bad enough, so I’ve been told. 
They’d like to use nothing but their own people, but 
they haven’t got enough to go around.” 


LARRY AND HIS TRIALS 


I 99 


Among the jackies to be transferred to the Shi- 
poma was Kino Nana. For several days after Larry 
had done him a good turn the Japanese had been 
fairly friendly, but now his old sourness of disposi- 
tion returned and he was ill-natured in the extreme, 
until scarcely any of his own countrymen cared to 
associate with him. 

“ That fellow is a Jonah ! ” grumbled old Luke. 
“ More’n likely he was responsible fer the wreckin’ 
o’ the Shohirika — them Jonahs always do some- 
thing!” 

“ He has forgotten what I did for him,” replied 
Larry, with a touch of bitterness that was perhaps 
excusable. 

“ A feller like that can’t remember nothin’ good, 
Larry. He’s always thinkin’ mean things an’ he 
imagines others think ’em too.” 

That evening Larry had another encounter with 
Kino Nana. It was over rations. A portion of the 
Japanese’s food had disappeared and he accused the 
young American of having taken it. 

“ I never touched it ! ” said Larry sharply. “ I 
am not that kind.” 

“ I know — you wait ! ” growled Kino Nana, and 
passed off grumbling to himself. 

The next morning when Larry went to eat his 
breakfast he found everything more than hot with 


200 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


pepper. He suspected the Japanese and caught the 
fellow with a paper of pepper on his person. 

“ This won’t do, Kino Nana!” he cried, and 
without another word took the fellow’s breakfast 
from him “ Now you can eat mine or go with- 
out,” he added. 

At once another quarrel ensued, and there would 
have been an open fight had not several officers put 
in an appearance. Kino Nana vowed revenge, and 
as he walked off gave Larry a look that was dark 
and full of hate. 

“ Watch yourself, Larry,” said Luke warningly. 
“ He’ll get the best of you if he can.” 

After dinner came orders to clean quarters and 
Larry was assigned to a certain portion of the lower 
deck. He set to work cheerfully, and in an hour 
had everything as “ clean as a whistle ” as he him- 
self expressed it. Then he walked to where Luke 
was working, to see how the old Yankee was pro- 
gressing. 

“ Inspection ! ” came the word a little later, and 
the officers began their rounds. Larry ran to where 
he had been at work, and at the same moment an 
officer approached. 

Larry had been filled with just pride over what he 
had accomplished, but when he looked in front of 
him his heart sank and he was filled with anger. 


LARRY AND HIS TRIALS 


201 


The place had been covered with muddy water and 
made as dirty as possible. 

“How is this?” demanded the Japanese officer. 
“ Were you not assigned to clean this? ” 

“ I was, sir,” answered the young sailor. 

“ It does not look very clean,” was the sarcastic 
comment. 

“ I cleaned it thoroughly, sir — less than half an 
hour ago. Somebody has dirtied it since.” 

At this the officer frowned. He gazed around for 
a moment. 

“ I shall have to report you,” he continued. “ We 
cannot permit such neglect of duty.” 

“ But, sir, I ” began Larry. 

“Not another word. Your name?” 

“ Lawrence Russell.” 

“ Go to work at once and clean this spot thor- 
oughly, and then report on the upper deck,” went on 
the officer, and marched off, to continue his inspec- 
tion. 

Larry's heart dropped like a lump of lead in his 
bosom. He felt that he was “ in for it,” and he 
could not help but wonder what his punishment 
would be. 


CHAPTER XXII 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 

“ What's the matter now, Larry? Thought you 
was all cleaned up long ago.” 

The words came from Luke, who chanced to ap- 
proach a moment after the inspection officer had 
passed on. 

“ Matter enough,” was the bitter reply. “ I did 
have everything cleaned up, but somebody was mean 
enough to muss it up again.” 

“ Who played ye that dirty trick ? ” 

“ I don’t know — excepting it might have been 
that Kino Nana. He is certainly down on me and 
equal to anything.” 

“ Then I’d go for him roughshod, lad. Make 
him clean up the muss.” 

“ I can’t prove that he did it. I didn’t see him.” 

“ The officer o’ the deck won’t like this.” 

“ He said he was going to report me. I’ve got to 
report to him as soon as I’ve finished up. I wonder 
what they’ll do to me.” 


202 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 203 

“ It’ll be a shame if they do anything,” said the 
old gunner. “ Didn’t you try to explain? ” 

“ He wouldn’t listen. He’s very strict — stricter 
than the officer we had on the Shohirika.” 

“ Yes, I know that. Here, let me help you,” and 
Luke took hold in his good-natured way. 

They had almost finished the task when, chancing 
to look up quickly, Larry discovered Kino Nana 
grinning at him from a distance. He dropped the 
swab he was using and ran after the wily Japanese, 
but Kino Nana managed to elude him and lose him- 
self in a crowd forward. 

“ I wish I could prove that he was the guilty fel- 
low,” said Larry, when he returned to his work. “ I 
declare, I am getting to fairly hate that chap — he is 
such a sneak ! ” 

He and his old friend talked the matter over until 
it was time for Larry to report, but without reaching 
any conclusion which was satisfactory to them. 
Then Larry walked off to “ face the music,” as he 
told Luke. 

The officer to whom he had to report was in an 
unusually bad humor that day and would scarcely 
listen to his explanation. 

“ I have heard too many excuses lately,” he said. 
“ Can you prove that somebody has been playing a 
trick on you ? ” 


204 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ No, sir — but I know that I cleaned up in first- 
class style,” returned the young sailor. 

“ Your word is not proof.” 

“ Some of the other men must have seen me clean- 
ing up.” 

At that moment another officer, who had been 
listening to the conversation, stepped up. He began 
to speak in a low tone, in Japanese, so that Larry 
did not understand him. 

“ Whom did you say you suspected of this ? ” de- 
manded the first officer, turning a moment later to 
Larry. 

“ A gunner’s assistant named Kino Nana.” 

“ Go with this officer and pick him out.” 

“ Yes, sir.” 

Larry saluted, and side by side with the second 
officer hurried into a crowd of jackies and singled 
out the wily Japanese. 

“ There he is, sir.” 

“ As I thought,” replied the officer, and touched 
Kino Nana on the arm. “ Come with me,” he 
added, to the fellow. 

The Japanese was startled, especially when he saw 
Larry by the officer’s side. 

“What is wanted, sir?” he asked, in his native 
tongue. 

The officer would not explain, but made the 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 205 

Japanese jacky follow him and Larry to where the 
inspection officer had been left. 

“ This is the man,” said he, pointing to Kino 
Nana. “ I saw him do the dirty deed.” 

“And this is the fellow you suspected?” asked 
the first officer, of Larry. 

“ Yes, sir.” 

“ He has a grudge against you ? ” 

“ Yes, sir. But it is of his own making. I have 
always tried to do the fair thing by him.” 

“ What have you to say for yourself ? ” The last 
words to Kino Nana. 

At last the wily Japanese realized that he was 
cornered. He tried to beg off, and said there must 
be some mistake. But neither of the officers would 
listen to him and he was marched off for punish- 
ment while Larry was told he might go. 

“ It was a close shave,” was Luke's comment, 
when the young sailor had related what had oc- 
curred. “ Now Kino Nana will be down on you 
worse than ever.” 

“ I’ll keep my eyes open for him,” answered 
Larry. 

It was not until three days later that Larry saw 
the Japanese again. Kino Nana glared at him 
wickedly, but when Larry stepped up with clenched 
fists and a determination in his eye that the other 


20 6 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


could not fail to understand, Kino Nana beat a 
hasty retreat, and after that kept his distance. 

The weather to follow proved fine, and as there 
was but little to do on board of the Shipoma , Larry 
and Luke got a good rest before Nagasaki was 
reached. 

“ I wonder if Captain Ponsberry is still here,” 
said Larry. “ If so I’d like to see him.” 

“ Reckon we can soon find out — if we git leave to 
go ashore,” answered Luke. 

Permission to go ashore was readily granted, and 
they were given a leave of absence for two days. 
They hunted up a shipping office and there ascer- 
tained that their old ship, the Columbia , was still 
at Nagasaki and that Captain Ponsberry was on 
board. 

“ Let us visit the schooner by all means,” cried 
Larry, and this was done. 

“ Glad to see ye both ! ” exclaimed Captain Pons- 
berry, as he shook each by the hand. “ Must say as 
how ye look natural. Had a heap of adventures 
since I saw ye last, I reckon.” 

They were greeted warmly by half a dozen on the 
old ship, and then the captain took them to the cabin, 
where he made them sit down and have lunch and 
tell their tale. 

“ It’s certainly wonderful how you escaped 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 20 7 

drowning,” he said. “ I suppose you expect to be 
transferred to one of the other warships?” 

“ Yes, but we don’t know what ship yet,” an- 
swered Larry. 

“ Heard from Ben and Captain Pennington?” 

“ No.” 

“ They’ve had a big fight, somewhere’s around 
Mukden, so I’ve been told — can’t git no particulars, 
they are that close-mouthed around here. I hope 
they came out of it O. K.” 

“ So do I, Captain Ponsberry. I’m going to 
send Ben a letter to-night.” 

“ What are you goin’ to do next, Cap’n? ” came 
from Luke. 

“ Going on a flying trip to Manila for the Rich- 
mond Importing Company. Their new agent hired 
me, at high pay.” 

“ Don’t fall into Russian hands again,” put in 
Larry, with a grin. 

“ I’ll try not to, lad. But when a sailor takes a 
risk he must take what comes along of it, too. But 
I’ll keep my weather eye open and do my best to 
avoid trouble,” added the captain. 

They were invited to remain on their old ship all 
night and did so. In the opinion of their old cap- 
tain, nothing was too good for them and he treated 
them to his best. 


208 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Tell ye what, Larry/’ was Luke’s remark, on 
turning in ; “ if I leave the navy I know what I’m 
a-goin’ to do.” 

“ Sign articles with Captain Ponsberry once 
more? ” 

“ You’ve struck it, lad.” 

“ Well, I don’t think you can do better, Luke. 
Of course the pay is not as great as you might get 
elsewhere, but ” 

“ Money ain’t everything in this life, Larry. 
He’s a man, every inch o’ him, and he knows how to 
treat others like men and not like dogs. He’s the 
best all-around sea cap’n I know of, barrin’ none ! ” 

“ And I agree with you,” answered Larry 
heartily. 

Larry knew that the Anglo-Chinese Company had 
an office in Nagasaki, and on the following day, 
after bidding farewell to Captain Ponsberry and the 
others on the Columbia , he and Luke called at the 
place and asked if they had any word from Port 
Arthur. 

“ We have sent a man out there to take charge,” 
was the answer 

“ Have you heard anything about Mr. Nathan 
Chase ? ” 

“ Why do you ask that? ” 

“ I am interested, for I was there when he dis- 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 20g 

appeared,” said Larry, and told as much of his story 
as he deemed necessary. 

“ Nothing has been heard of Mr. Chase,” was the 
answer. “ His disappearance is something we can- 
not understand. Miss Chase is greatly worried, but 
we can do nothing for her. Some money is gone, 
too, and we cannot find out where it has gone to or 
who took it. We have heard something of this Olaf 
Pallak and a man named Boschnoff, but we cannot 
locate the fellows. As you know, business affairs 
at Port Arthur are still in a confused condition.” 

“ You haven’t heard from my brother, or from 
Captain Pennington?” 

“ Not yet, although we have been looking for a 
letter by every mail steamer.” 

This was all the satisfaction the young sailor 
could get, and he was in a thoughtful mood as he 
returned to the Shipoma with his old Yankee friend. 

On the following day came in some details of the 
great battle of Mukden and Larry listened to what 
he was told with deep interest. 

“ Ben and Gilbert must have been in the midst of 
that fight, Luke ! ” he cried. “ What a glorious vic- 
tory it was ! ” Then his face clouded. “ I trust 
neither of them was killed or wounded.” 

“ So do I, Larry. Yes, it was certainly a rousing 
victory. The Russians won’t get over it very soon. 


210 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


It’s a knockdown blow like the one they got when 
Port Arthur fell.” 

Two days later came word that a certain portion 
of the gunners and jackies from the Shohinka were 
to be transferred to the Mikasa, Admiral Togo’s flag- 
ship. This news created something of a sensation. 

“ Oh, Luke, I hope we are transferred to the 
flagship ! ” cried Larry enthusiastically. “ I’d like 
nothing better than to serve under Admiral Togo 
himself.” 

“ Well, we’ve been under Admiral Togo right 
along,” answered the Yankee gunner. 

“ Yes, but wouldn’t you like to serve on his own 
ship?” 

“ Don’t know but what I would — if they’ve got a 
gun to spare fer me.” 

“ I’m going to put in an application,” went on 
Larry, and hurried off on his mission. 

He found that nearly all of those who had come 
from the Shohirika wanted to serve on the Mikasa. 
Yet only forty men were wanted, including but two 
gunners and their crews. 

“ How did you make it?” asked Luke when he 
came back. 

“ The officers are going over the records of all the 
men,” answered Larry. “ The best will get the 
appointments.” 


A NEW APPOINTMENT 


2 1 1 


After that two days of anxiety passed. Then the 
survivors of the Shohirika were mustered and an 
address was delivered to them. Some were to go 
to one warship and some to another. At last the 
roll was called and the appointments read off. 

“ Hurrah, we have gained our point ! ” cried 
Larry and threw up his cap. It was true; and he 
and Luke were notified to hold themselves in readi- 
ness for transferral to the admiral’s flagship at any 
moment. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


THE WATER-LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 

In all the navies of the world it is considered an 
honor to serve on an admiral’s flagship, and the men 
chosen to join Admiral Togo’s vessel, the Mikasa , 
were much elated over their success. 

“ It’s a feather in our cap, Luke ! ” cried Larry 
enthusiastically. “ Don’t you think so?” 

“ Indeed I do, lad,” answered the old Yankee 
gunner, his face wreathed in smiles. “ I don’t 
reckon, though, that some of these Japs like our 
steppin’ in ahead of ’em.” 

“ Well, we can’t help that, Luke; all of those to 
go were chosen on the order of their merits.” 

On the following day the men to leave the 
Shipoma were told to pack their ditty-bags and 
boxes, and late in the afternoon were transferred to 
a small coast-defense ship called the Otamka. 

“ Where are we going now ? ” questioned Larry 
of an under officer who was going with the men. 

“ We have not been told that,” was the answer. 


THE WATER-LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 213 

“ Admiral Togo is just now keeping his whereabouts 
a secret.” 

“ On the lookout for the coming Russian fleet, I 
suppose.” 

“ More than likely.” 

“ Have they any idea where the Russian fleet is 
now ? ” 

“ Perhaps Admiral Togo knows — I do not,” an- 
swered the under officer. 

“But the fleet is surely coming?” went on the 
young sailor. 

“ Oh, yes, it left the Baltic Sea many months ago. 
Some of the ships have come through the Mediter- 
ranean Sea and the Suez Canal, and the others sailed 
around the southern point of Africa.” 

“ Have they any idea how many ships the Czar is 
sending out ? ” 

“ There are six or eight battleships, ten or twelve 
cruisers, and half a dozen other vessels, so I have 
been told. The fleet started months ago, as I said, 
and has been picking up other warships on the 
way.” 

“ Who is in command ? ” 

“ Admiral Rojestvensky, who has been one of 
their best sea fighters for years.” 

“ Then, if we meet that Baltic fleet, there is likely 
to be some fierce fighting.” 


214 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ You are right, but I believe we’ll be able to hold 
our own,” responded the under officer, as he turned 
away to attend to his duties. 

What the officer had told Larry concerning the 
Russian Baltic fleet was, in the main, true. This 
fleet, containing all that was practically left of the 
Czar’s navy after the naval battles in and around 
Port Arthur waters, left the Baltic late in the fall of 
the year before, while the fate of Port Arthur was 
still in doubt. It was headed by Admiral Rojest- 
vensky’s flagship, the Kniaz Souvciroff, carrying 
sixteen guns> and nearly eight hundred men. Such 
ships as could get through the Suez Canal were sent 
to Chinese waters that way and the other vessels 
made the longer trip around Cape Town, Africa, 
and up the east coast past the Island of Madagas- 
car. 

When the fall of Port Arthur was announced to 
the world it was felt by the Japanese authorities that 
the Russian fleet would not attempt to sail to that 
seaport. Then came the great Japanese victory at 
Mukden, and the cries of the Mikado’s men were 
“ On to Vladivostok ! ” Vladivostok was now the 
only seaport of importance held by the Russians 
on the coast of the Sea of Japan. Could this be 
captured, Russia’s outlet in eastern Siberia would be 
completely cut off. 


THE WATER- LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 21 5 

Vladivostok must, therefore, be the point which 
Admiral Rojestvensky would try to reach, in order 
to assist in defending it against the further attacks 
of Togo’s navy. But how the Russian admiral 
would try to gain that seaport was a question. He 
might sail up the coast of Korea, through the straits 
which separate that body of land from Japan, or he 
might go around to the eastward, between Japan 
and the Philippine Islands, and force his way to 
Vladivostok by way of the Tsugaru Strait, between 
the Japanese Islands of Hokkaido and Hondo. 

These two 1 routes to Vladivostok lay hundreds of 
miles apart, so it can readily be seen that Admiral 
Togo had a great problem before him. Unknown 
to the rest of the civilized world, he stationed his 
swiftest vessels on guard,. so that they covered every 
possible advance of the Russian fleet. Many of the 
vessels were equipped with machines for wireless 
telegraphy, and strict orders were given that a watch 
must be kept night and day, regardless of the 
weather, and an alarm must be sent out immediately 
upon the discovery of the Russian fleet’s approach. 

Admiral Togo’s heavy battleships were not needed 
for this “ scout work,” if such it may be called, and 
they were assembled at or near the Korean seaport 
of Masampho, in readiness to dash out upon the 
enemy at any moment. The warships had been 


21 6 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


painted a light green and gray, so that they could 
scarcely be seen at a distance when on the deep sea. 
The Japanese admiral now had thirty cruisers and 
battleships under his command, besides a flotilla of 
torpedo destroyers and numerous submarines, and 
ships engaged in putting down mines and carrying 
supplies. 

For several days the time passed pleasantly on 
board of the Otamka. Larry and Luke were the 
only Americans on the warship, but the Japanese 
around them were sociable in the extreme. One 
day the ship came to a halt for a few slight repairs 
to the engine and over a dozen jackies went swim- 
ming, by permission of one of the officers. A race 
was held, and much to old Luke’s satisfaction Larry 
came in the winner. 

“ Good fer you, lad! ” cried the Yankee gunner. 
“ Show ’em what Uncle Sam’s boys can do.” 

A prize had been put up, consisting of a pair of 
real Japanese shoes, and Larry accepted them with 
thanks. But as he could not wear the articles he, 
later on, gave the shoes to the man who had come in 
second in the race. 

On the following morning the Otamka encoun- 
tered an extra heavy sea. This was most unusual, 
especially in view of the fact that the weather for a 
week had been fine. 


THE WATER-LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 21 7 

“ What do you make of this, Luke ? ” inquired 
Larry, as he watched the waves rise and pound the 
side of the warship. 

“ Don’t know what to make on it, Larry. Never 
saw nuthin’ like it afore.” 

“ Do you think there has been a tidal wave? ” 

“ It might be that, or else one o’ them earthquakes 
they have out here now an’ then. This heavy sea 
certainly didn’t come from a storm. The sky is as 
clear as crystal.” 

During the afternoon an extra heavy sea washed 
over the stern of the warship, doing not a little 
damage. It flooded one of the cabins, and an of- 
ficer had a narrow escape from drowning. 

“ This certainly must be from an earthquake un- 
der the ocean,” said Larry, and his surmise was cor- 
rect. The earthquake was followed by another that 
night, and the disturbance wrecked several sailing 
vessels which, long afterwards, were reported lost. 
During the second earthquake a small island off the 
coast of Japan entirely disappeared ! 

As it appeared to be calmer after sunset, Larry 
and Luke went forward, to look over the bow of the 
Otamka at some strange fish which were sporting 
in front of the warship. The fish were of a peculiar 
silvery color and flashed back and forth in the sea 
with great rapidity. 


2l8 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ That earthquake, or whatever it was, must have 
frightened them,” remarked Larry. “Just see them 
shoot around, Luke ! ” 

“ A fellow could catch a lot o’ ’em if he had a big 
net,” answered the old Yankee gunner. “ Might be 
they’d make good eatin’, too.” 

They remained forward for a long time, looking 
at the fish and discussing the strange disturbance 
of the sea. Then Luke left his comrade to go 
below. 

“ Coming, Larry? ” he asked. 

“ Not just yet. I’ll be down presently. I just 
love this keen salt air.” 

Left to himself Larry continued to gaze at the 
fish, as they occasionally leaped from the water and 
struck the side of the warship. Then his attention 
was attracted to a dark object lying on the bosom of 
the sea quite a distance away. 

“ I’d like to know what that is,” he murmured to 
himself, as he surveyed the object. “ Looks like 
some wreckage, or else it’s a submarine craft ! Per- 
haps I’d better call an officer.” 

He was about to turn away when he felt the war- 
ship rise up suddenly on a swell of the sea and then 
drop back. An instant later came a big wave, that 
swept the bow of the Otarnka completely. Larry 
was taken off his feet, and before he knew what was 


THE WATER-LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 219 

happening felt himself being sucked overboard by 
the receding wave. 

“ Help ! ” he yelled lustily. It was the only word 
he could utter, for a moment later the sea water 
rushed into his mouth, nearly drowning him. He 
sank down and down and struggled wildly, scarcely 
knowing what he was doing or trying to' do. 

When Larry at length came to the surface he felt 
more dead than alive. He put out his hands to 
grasp something, but could feel only the water, 
which boiled and surged all around him. Not far 
away was the warship, but it was rapidly leaving 
him behind. 

“ Help ! ” he cried once more, but nobody heard 
his call for assistance. He did not know that two 
others had been hurled from the ship and that both 
had sunk to a watery grave. 

Even though Larry was a good swimmer, the 
most he could do in that high sea was to hold his 
head above water. He strained his eyes to keep the 
warship in sight, but soon the Otamka disappeared 
from view in the fast-gathering gloom. 

Inside of five minutes the young sailor was thor- 
oughly exhausted by his struggles. Then, as he 
thought he must give up, he felt something scrape 
along past his legs. Putting down a hand, he 
grasped a water-soaked and slimy rope. 


220 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


As the drowning man is said to catch at a straw, 
Larry caught at the rope and held fast to it. Then, 
as the rope came to the surface, he made out that it 
was attached to some dark object seventy-five or a 
hundred feet away. Without knowing what the 
object was, he pulled himself toward it. 

As he came closer he found that the rope was 
fast to the wreck of a Chinese junk. Over the deck 
of the craft lay the mast and the remnants of the 
lugsail, of coarse matting. The bow was square 
and the stern clumsy and high. 

Using all the strength left to him, Larry pulled 
himself aboard the junk. She was badly water- 
logged and most of her cargo had long since gone to 
the bottom of the sea. The rudder had been washed 
away, and she was drifting at the mercy of the 
elements. 

For several minutes Larry was too exhausted to 
look up from the seat upon which he had fallen. 
Gasping and spluttering, he clung fast to the seat 
with one hand and to the matting of the sail with 
the other. Thus fully a quarter of an hour passed. 

Gradually the young sailor began to feel like him- 
self once more. The junk pitched and tossed 
woefully, but for this he did not care. He had a 
bottom of some sort under him, and this meant 
everything. 


THE WATER-LOGGED CHINESE JUNK 221 

“ Hullo there ! ” he called out presently. “ Is 
anybody aboard of this craft, or am I all alone? ” 

No answer came back to his inquiry, and he 
strained his eyes to look about him. But the dark- 
ness shut out nearly everything. 

“ Hullo ! ” he called again, this time in a louder 
voice. 

Scarcely had he uttered the shout when he heard 
a rustling at the other end of the junk. Then came 
the low growl of some wild animal, a sound that 
filled him with new alarm. 


CHAPTER XXIV 


LARRY AND THE BEAR 

“ What can that be? ” 

This was the question that Larry asked himself 
as the low growl of the wild animal reached his 
ears. The sound was such an unlooked-for one 
that at first he was inclined to discredit the evidence 
of his senses. 

“ Some wild animal, but what? ” he mused. “ It 
can’t possibly be a dog.” 

He waited for the sound to be repeated, but noth- 
ing came to his ears but the swash of the sea as it 
hit the junk on the side and over the prow. 

“ Hullo ! ” he called, after several minutes of 
silence, and when he had half convinced himself that 
he had not heard aright. 

Again came the growl, this time in a note that was 
unmistakable. It was full of anger and warning. 

“ Some wild beast, that’s certain,” he reasoned. 
“ But if so, why doesn’t it attack me? Perhaps it is 
afraid to move for fear of falling overboard.” 


222 


LARRY AND THE BEAR 


223 


The discovery that a beast of some sort was on 
the junk with him was decidedly unpleasant, and as 
weak as he was he felt around for something with 
which to defend himself. At his feet lay a heavy 
stick of wood, iron-bound, and he picked it up with 
satisfaction. Then he got out his jackknife and 
opened the largest blade. 

Another quarter of an hour went by, and he heard 
no more from the animal. Once he fancied he saw 
the gleam of a pair of glaring eyes, but he was not 
sure. 

On all sides of the water-logged junk, which was 
perhaps forty feet in length by ten feet wide, the sea 
tumbled and tossed almost as wildly as ever. That 
the junk contained no other human being than him- 
self he was now certain. Evidently the craft had 
been abandoned for some time. 

Slowly the night wore away. With the coming 
of day a mist crept over the sea, shutting out the 
distant view upon all sides. Afar off he heard a 
hoarse steam whistle, but had no means of answering 
it. 

With the coming of day, Larry strained his eyes 
to see what sort of a wild animal it was he had for 
a companion on the derelict. Twice he saw a cor- 
ner of the matting sail bulge upward, as if some 
heavy body was moving underneath. He had 


224 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


changed his place several times and now he took a 
station on the high stern of the junk. 

Presently an extra heavy wave caused the lug- 
sail to slip over the side of the boat. Only a few 
half-rotten grass ropes held it, and soon it was 
free and floating at a distance. Then what was left 
of the mast likewise dropped overboard. 

As the matting sail went by the board, Larry be- 
held a dark-looking wild beast crouched close to the 
prow of the junk. It was a small bear and looked 
at him with eyes full of mingled fear and rage. The 
bear had one ear shot away and was suffering from 
a broken forepaw. 

What to do in this unusual situation Larry did 
not know. Had he had a gun or pistol he could 
have made short work of the beast, but he had only 
the club and the jackknife, and the bear was too far 
off to be reached with either of these. 

He could not help but wonder how and in what 
manner the beast had gotten aboard of the junk. 
Had the derelict been stranded on the coast for a 
while and had his bearship found his way on board 
during that time? 

“ I wish I had a pistol, I’d pepper you mighty 
quick ! ” Larry told himself. 

The young sailor eyed the bear and the bear eyed 
the young sailor, and for a good ten minutes neither 





He brought the club around with all the strength he could 
muster. — Page 225. 




LARRY AND THE BEAR 


225 


made a move. Then the beast began slowly to crawl 
forward, sniffing the air as he came. He was very 
hungry, having had no food for thirty-six hours, and 
he felt he must risk something in the quest of the 
wherewith to fill his stomach. 

It made Larry’s heart beat fast to see the beast 
coming for him, inch by inch, with eyes on the alert 
and with his sharp fangs fully exposed. Retreat 
was out of the question. He must stand his ground 
and do what he could to defend himself. 

The broken forepaw made the progress of the 
bear uncertain, and once he stopped and made a 
move as if to go back to his former position. But 
the pangs of hunger would not let him do this, and 
he came on, growling softly. 

At Larry’s feet lay a block of wood, and unable 
to resist the temptation, the young sailor caught it 
up and hurled it straight at the bear. The beast 
was hit in the head and uttered a roar of pain and 
anger. Then, gathering himself up, he made a leap 
for Larry, intending to hug him and bite him at the 
same time. 

Larry felt that the crucial moment had come, and 
nerving himself, he brought the club around with all 
the strength he could muster. It caught the bear 
fairly and squarely on the side of the head, and 
literally broke the beast’s jawbone. There was a 


226 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

grunt and a howl and the bear dropped back in 
awful pain. 

Seeing how successful his first blow had been, 
Larry now leaped forward and dealt the bear an- 
other. It struck bruin in the neck, and lifting his 
paw the beast tore at the young sailor’s leg, leaving 
a deep and painful scratch on the member. Then 
Larry struck out once more, this time landing plump 
on the bear’s mouth. The beast tumbled backwards, 
hit the gunwale of the junk, and in a twinkling fell 
overboard. 

A rush of joy and relief filled Larry’s heart as he 
saw the waters of the sea close momentarily over his 
enemy. But then, with a sputter, the bear emerged 
from the brine and tried to clamber on board once 
more. 

“ You’re not coming on board if I can help it ! ” 
muttered Larry, and hit the bear on the paws with 
the club. Down went the beast once again, and 
when he came up a second time he was several yards 
from the junk. As well as he was able he started 
to swim towards the craft. But his progress was 
slow and it was now evident that he was well-nigh 
exhausted. 

“ You’re not coming on board,” cried Larry, and 
held his club in readiness. But then a sudden 
thought flashed through his mind and he caught up 


LARRY AND THE BEAR 


227 


a pretty fair rope that lay near. He made a noose 
at the end of the rope, and watching his chance 
dropped this over the bear’s head. Then he ran the 
rope through a ring near the stern of the junk and 
pulled on the line with all the strength he could 
muster. 

This sudden hauling in could have but one result. 
It combined to half drown and half choke the bear, 
and when his throat was brought up close to the 
ring he was more dead than alive. Taking his 
jackknife Larry watched his opportunity and drove 
it home into the beast’s jugular vein, and in a minute 
more the bear breathed his last and the novel battle 
was over. 

When he was certain the beast was dead the 
young sailor dropped on a seat of the junk. He 
found himself bathed in cold perspiration and trem- 
bling from head to foot. Now for the first time he 
realized what a peril he had escaped. 

“ I never want such a fight as that again,” he told 
himself. “ If I hadn’t killed him, he most likely 
would have killed me ! ” 

Leaving the bear to drag behind the junk, Larry 
went on a tour of inspection. It did not take long, 
and he soon discovered that the junk was hopelessly 
water-logged and liable to sink at any time. At 
the bottom, in the water, lay a cask of stale rice 


228 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


biscuits and some decayed fish. The fish he threw 
overboard, but saved the biscuits. 

Larry had just completed his examination of the 
craft when a splashing near the stern attracted his 
attention. Several sharks had come up and were 
trying to make a meal of the bear. 

“ I’ll have to stop that,” he told himself, and not 
without difficulty managed to get the animal on 
board once more. Then he made up his mind to 
have some of the bear meat for breakfast. 

In the stern of the junk was a little wood that 
was fairly dry. Some of this he cut up with his 
knife into splinters, and added some heavier sticks 
from the broken mast. In his pocket he had a 
waterproof match safe with some matches, and soon 
a blaze was started in a small fire-pot he found on 
board. The fire under way he took his knife, skinned 
a portion of the bear, and cut out such a steak as he 
thought he could eat. 

Inside of half an hour Larry was sitting on the 
stern of the junk, devouring the steak with a relish. 
Yet it must be confessed that his heart was anything 
but light. On all sides of him rolled the misty sea, 
and where this wild adventure was going to end he 
could not surmise. 

“ If the junk goes down, that will be the end of 
it, so far as I am concerned,” he told himself dis- 


LARRY AND THE BEAR 229 

mally. “ I’ll become food for those sharks I just 
chased away! ” 

Slowly the day passed, the mist growing thicker 
during the afternoon, until he could not see a dozen 
yards in any direction. Then it began to rain. The 
water came down on the stern covering in a flood 
and he caught it in an iron pot which was on board 
and drank it eagerly. 

During the evening, to keep warm, he lit another 
fire, from boards taken from the stern of the junk, 
and cooked himself two large steaks, so that he 
might have food for the morrow also. As long as 
the rain fell he collected what water he could, that 
he might not run out of something to drink. He 
tried the stale biscuits, but found them totally unfit 
for use and threw them overboard. 

It was not until four in the morning of the day 
following that the rain ceased and the mist began to 
drift away. Larry was now utterly worn out and 
so sleepy he could scarcely keep his eyes open. The 
sea had become fairly calm once more, and as he 
watched the junk rise and fall slowly his head sank 
on his breast, and presently he went sound asleep. 

How long he slept he did not know, and when he 
awoke he was very much confused. Strange faces 
were bending over him and a hand was on his 
shoulder, shaking him. 


230 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ Russell ! ” came the call. “ What is the matter 
with you? Are you dead? ” 

He looked up and for the moment fancied he 
must be asleep. 

“ Wha — what’s the matter?” he stammered. 
4i Where am I ? ” And then he added, “ Oh, are 
you from our ship ? ” 

“Of course we’re from the ship, Larry!” called 
out another voice, and looking beside the junk the 
young tar saw a small boat from the Otamka reit- 
ing there, with Luke among half a dozen jackies. 
“ How in the world did you get on this derelict, I’d 
like to know? ” 

“ I found it — after I had been swept overboard,” 
answered Larry. His heart was bounding with a 
mad joy. “Oh, this is the best yet! Then I am 
really saved ! ” 

“ Yes — or you will be when we git aboard the 
ship. Hullo, what’s that bear doin’ here? ” 

“ He was on board too. We had a fight and I 
killed him.” 

“ Come, you can tell your story when we are on 
board our warship,” ordered the officer who had 
first spoken. “ We have no time to waste here,” 
he added. 

“ Where is our ship ? ” 

“ Over yonder.” And looking in the direction 


LARRY AND THE BEAR 


23I 


pointed out, Larry saw the Otamka with engines at 
rest less than an eighth of a mile away. He 
scrambled from the junk to the small boat, and in 
another moment the whole party was on its way to 
the warship. 


CHAPTER XXV 


ADMIRAL TOGO AND HIS FLAGSHIP 

“ It was certainly a wonderful happening,” was 
Luke’s comment, after he had listened to Larry’s 
story in detail. “ If it hadn’t been fer that junk a- 
happenin’ along ” 

“ And the bear, Luke ” 

“ Yes, the bear came in mighty handy for meat. 
But I allow as how I’d rather git my meat out o’ a 
tin can,” went on the old Yankee sagely. 

After a good day’s rest on the warship Larry felt 
like himself once more. The tale he had to tell 
made him quite a hero in the eyes of the other 
jackies, especially those who had caught sight of 
the bear. 

Several more days passed, and now a constant 
lookout was being kept for the ships of Admiral 
Togo’s fleet. The Otamka was in the vicinity of 
the Korean coast and knew that the vessels must be 
close at hand. 

“ The fleet! ” was the cry early one morning, and 
it proved to be correct. Not far away rested the 


232 


ADMIRAL TOGO AND HIS FLAGSHIP 233 

flagship Mikasa, and in the distance were the battle- 
ships Asahi , Chin Yen , and Fuji , with other vessels 
lying further northward. The ships were in fine 
trim and presented a truly imposing appearance as 
Larry and Luke gazed upon them. 

“ They look like business, don’t they? ” remarked 
the young sailor, as the Otamka drew closer. 

“ Well, I reckon they are out fer business, Larry 
— if they are lucky enough to catch that Russian 
fleet.” 

“ I see all of them have steam up.” 

“ Oh, it wouldn’t do to be caught napping. A 
warship without steam up wouldn’t be o’ no more 
account nor a canal boat in a running sea fight. You 
know that as well as I do.” 

As my old readers know, Larry and Luke had 
been on board of Admiral Togo’s flagship before, 
so the vessel had a familiar look to them. To those 
not acquainted with warships many look alike, but 
to a naval person each ship has its peculiarities even 
though it may have one or more “ sisters,” as it is 
termed, that is ships built on the same general plan. 

The Mikasa was a battleship of the first class, 
having a displacement of 15,362 tons. As men- 
tioned before, she carried eighteen guns of large 
size. Her crew at the present time numbered nine 
hundred and thirty-five. Her rate of speed was 


234 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


about seventeen knots an hour, although under a 
forced draught she had made considerably more. 

As the sea was calm, it was a comparatively easy 
matter to transfer the men from the Otamka to the 
Mikasa and by nightfall Larry and Luke found 
themselves duly installed on board of the flagship. 
The men were lined up and the roll was called, after 
which all were assigned to their places. 

Much to the old Yankee gunner’s satisfaction he 
was given command of one of the guns of the 
secondary battery — a piece which had once been 
under the care of Steve Colton. This tickled Luke 
very much, and as Larry was put in the crew of the 
same gun the young sailor was correspondingly 
elated. 

The Americans found the men on the flagship a 
strong, sturdy, good-natured • set, the pick of the 
Japanese navy. The gunners were highly trained 
and kept their pieces in the pink of condition. 
There were drills daily, in the presence of the 
Mikasa’s captain and of Admiral Togo, and not in- 
frequently the captain and the admiral strolled 
through the ship on a general tour of inspection. 

It was on one of these tours that Admiral Togo 
stopped near the gun by which Luke and Larry were 
standing and gazed at the Americans curiously. 
Both were at attention. 


ADMIRAL TOGO AND HIS FLAGSHIP 235 

u I believe I have seen you before,” he said. 

“ Yes, sir,” answered Larry, for the admiral had 
his eye on the young gunner’s assistant. 

“ Where was it ? ” 

“ At Nagasaki, sir. We came on board with 
another American gunner, Steve Colton. You 
asked to see us, because we had served under Ad- 
miral Dewey at Manila.” 

“ Ah, yes, I remember now.” The Japanese ad- 
miral smiled faintly. “ And now you are to serve 
here. Were you on board of the ill-fated 
Shohirika ? ” 

“ Yes, sir; we served on her during the bombard- 
ment of Port Arthur.” 

“ I see. Then you have had considerable experi- 
ence at gunnery, no doubt?” The admiral now 
turned to Luke. 

“ Quite some, sir,” answered the old Yankee gun- 
ner. “We helped to smash the Spanish ships in 
Manila harbor, and fought off Port Arthur, as Rus- 
sell says.” 

“ Then I trust you will give a good account of 
yourselves while on board of the ship,” said Admiral 
Togo, and sauntered away by the side of the 
Mikasa’s captain. 

The drills on the flagship were unusually severe, 
purposely so, in order to set a proper example for 


236 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

the rest of the fleet. Larry and Luke were examined 
thoroughly and made to manipulate the gun until 
each movement was exactly as the head gunner 
wanted it. 

“ These Japs know their business, no two ways 
on it,” was Luke’s comment. “ One thing is certain, 
they ain’t goin’ to let thet Roosterwensky — or what’s 
his jaw-breakin’ name — catch ’em nappin’.” 

“ It’s the only way to win out, Luke,” said Larry. 
“ Don’t you know what Walter said about the 
fight off Santiago ? They were on the watch night 
and day for weeks — waiting for Cervera to make 
a move.” 

Outside of the gun drills, Larry was particularly 
interested in the cutlass practice. There was one 
young Japanese who took a liking to the young 
American, and who knew how to handle a cutlass 
exceedingly well. He gave Larry many “ pointers,” 
for which the latter was thankful. 

“ You are certainly an expert, Dalji,” said Larry, 
after one of their bouts was at an end. 

“ I geet him from mine fadder,” answered Dalji. 
“ He geet him from hees fadder. Hees fadder 
great swordsman to de Emperor. Can cut off a 
head with one sweep, like dis! ” And the Japanese 
made a quick sweep with his blade. 

“ Phew ! no wonder you know how to use the 


ADMIRAL TOGO AND HIS FLAGSHIP 237 

blade! I don’t know that I want to cut off a head 
with one blow.” 

“ Better one blow as two, tree blows, not so ? 
Maybe udder feller he cut too — yo’ head come off 
first, what den ? ” 

“ That would be hard luck for me. As between 
my head and the other fellow’s, I’d rather see his go 
first,” answered Larry. 

“ No fight to-day like gran’fadder fight,” went on 
Dalji. “ Da go run at each udder like mad, yell 
and yell. Chinese have fans an’ umbrellas, yes, an’ 
Japanese have dem, too, sometimes. Blood run 
much — no give wounded man a chance for life, not 
much! Kill him quick, kill everybody. No doc- 
tors, no hospitals, no sick men ! A man is well or 
he is dead ! ” 

“ Yes, I’ve heard of that sort of thing. I’m 
glad we are not quite so barbarous, although fighting 
to-day is bad enough. We do what we can for the 
sick and wounded.” 

“ War all werry bad, but must be,” returned the 
Japanese, and shrugged his shoulders. 

The quarters assigned to Luke and Larry were 
fairly comfortable ones on the lower deck. Each 
had a good hammock, and a cup, plate, knife, fork, 
and spoon, besides a bowl for soup or stew. Each 
had also his ditty-bag and they had a ditty-box 


238 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

between them. They were required to keep each 
article scrupulously clean. 

For wearing apparel they had two sets of under- 
wear, several extra pairs of socks, two pairs of 
shoes, two flannel outing shirts, two' suits and two 
caps. Each had also a heavy jacket for cold 
weather, and a leather apron, for use when working 
over the gun. 

Taken as a whole the Japanese jackies were a 
silent set, rarely singing or dancing, as is the custom 
among sailors in the American, English, and 
French navies. Many of them played games with 
cards, and also with checkers, chess, dominoes, and 
jackstraws. Not all of them could read, but those 
who could, read everything that came to hand. 
Many of them would often indulge in Jiu Jitsu com- 
bats, and the winners of such contests were always 
loudly applauded. 

“ That Jiu Jitsu is quite an institution/’ remarked 
Luke, after watching one of the bouts. “ Did ye 
notice how that little chap had the big feller at his 
mercy simply by pressing his wrist up into his 
side?” 

“ Kino Nana tried some of those tricks on me,” 
answered Larry. “ But he wasn’t an expert at it. 
If he had been, I suppose he would have floored me 
in no time.” 


ADMIRAL TOGO AND HIS FLAGSHIP 239 

“ To know Jiu Jitsu is as good as to be a good 
fighter,” said one of the men standing near, a gun- 
ner who could speak English. “ Some say a man 
who understands Jiu Jitsu can do anything, but 
that is not so. A man with good muscles, and who 
is quick, can at times get the best of a Jiu Jitsu 
worker.” 

“ Is it an old art? ” asked Larry. 

“ Quite old. It is now taught in some of our 
schools, just as some of you Americans learn how to 
box.” 

The days passed and still the warships of Admiral 
Togo’s fleet kept in the vicinity of the Korean coast 
and not far from Masampho. Smaller vessels were 
sent out to guard the straits, and wireless messages 
were being sent back and forth constantly. 

In the meantime the Baltic fleet of the Russian 
navy was slowly gathering in Indo-China waters for 
a dash for Vladivostok. One vessel or another had 
stopped at this port or that, and the news had been 
quickly carried to Admiral Togo. In a few cases 
Admiral Rojestvensky sent ships to ports at a dis- 
tance, trying by this means to put the Japanese on a 
false scent, but the trick did not succeed. Admiral 
Togo did not want to go after the enemy. He knew 
where the Russians wanted to get to, and he was 
content to lie in wait for them. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


LARRY BEFORE THE ADMIRAL 

“ Letters ! letters ! letters ! ” 

Such was the welcome cry on the following morn- 
ing, and soon the men on the Mikasa were crowding 
around the mail officer, anxious to learn if there was 
anything for them. 

“ Here’s a letter for you, Luke!” cried Larry, 
and passed it over. 

“ Thank you, lad; did you get any? ” 

“ Two — one from home, and one from some place 
in Manchuria — but it’s not in Ben’s handwriting, 
or Gilbert’s either,” added the young sailor. 

Luke’s letter was from a distant relative and full 
of home news greatly to his liking. The letter from 
home for Larry was from his Uncle Job, telling 
of various matters of interest and wishing him well. 

The other letter for the young sailor proved to be 
from Dan Casey, and ran, in part, as follows : 

“ I know you’ll think it strange to hear from me, 
Larry, but Carl Stummer and I think it best to take 


240 


LARRY BEFORE THE ADMIRAL 


24I 


up a pen and send you the word, although it’s tough 
to do that same and Carl and I are sick at heart 
thinking it over. Bad luck to the rascals who did 
the deed ! 

“ I’m writing to tell you that Ben has disappeared, 
and Gilbert is gone too, and the old Nick only knows 
where. Their command took a lot of prisoners 
from Mukden to the seacoast, and there Ben and 
Gilbert, it seems, fell in with a rascal you know, a 
fellow by name of Boschnoff. From this Bosch- 
noff they heard something about the rascal, Olaf 
Pallak, and his brother, a sea captain, and thought 
the two had carried Mr. Chase to sea with them. 
They started off on a hunt, and hired a small boat — 
and that’s the last seen or heard of them. The 
authorities at the seaport tried to follow the ship 
belonging, to Pallak’s brother — she was named the 
Krimetz, and flying a German flag — but the ship got 
away in a fog. 

“ I’m sorry to send this news, and so is Carl, \yho 
sits by my side as I write this. Poor Ben! Poor 
Gilbert! It may be they are at the bottom of that 
seaport harbor, or else the Kritmetz sailed off with 
them on board. 

“ Carl and myself are doing well. We have 
chased them Russians off to a place called Tie-Ling, 
and I think we’ll end up by driving them out of the 


242 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

country entirely. Both of us were wounded, but 
are getting along finely. We have now a special 
company of sharpshooters of our own. I am the 
captain and Carl is first lieutenant — and we get 
paid accordingly, which is the best part of it. 

“ If you get this let me know at once, for if you 
don’t, I want to know about it. I heard something 
of the wrecking of one of the warships, but Carl and 
I trust you and your friend Luke were not on board 
of her. They say a big Russian fleet is coming to 
smash the Jap navy. If that fleet comes, treat it as 
Dewey treated the Spaniards at Manila.” 

“ Ben and Gilbert are missing ! ” gasped Larry, 
after he had read the letter aloud to Luke. “ Oh, 
Luke, isn’t that too bad ! ” 

“ It certainly is awful, lad,” was the sober answer. 
“ I didn’t expect no sech news as that.” 

“ As Dan says, they must either be dead or on 
board of that ship belonging to Pallak’s brother.” 

“ It’s too bad he couldn’t give you more partic- 
ulars,” went on the old Yankee gunner. 

“ Don’t you suppose I could get the particulars 
elsewhere? ” 

“ That depends. You might ask our captain 
about it — if you git the chance.” 

“ I will.” 


LARRY BEFORE THE ADMIRAL 243 

But instead of asking the captain, Larry asked 
Admiral Togo himself. It came about by accident. 
When the young sailor went on deck, he found a 
stiff sea breeze blowing. As he hurried on, some- 
thing whirled past him in the air, and he put out his 
hand and caught the object. It proved to be the 
admiral’s hat, and looking up he saw Admiral Togo 
standing not far off, bareheaded. Larry saluted and 
came forward. 

“ Is this your hat, sir? ” he asked. 

“ It is. Thank you,” returned the admiral, and 
placed the headgear firmly on his head. 

“ Admiral Togo, may I speak to you for a mo- 
ment ? ” went on Larry, after an instant’s hesita- 
tion. 

“ What do you desire ? ” 

“ I have bad news concerning my brother and a 
dear friend of mine, both of whom are captains in 
General Nogi’s army. They are missing, and it 
may be that they have been carried off to sea in a 
vessel called the Krimetz, which flies the German 
flag.” 

“ This is rather extraordinary, Russell. Tell me 
some of the details.” And the admiral’s face showed 
that his curiosity was aroused. 

As briefly as he could Larry told of the contents 
of the letter he had received and showed the epistle. 


244 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Then he told about Nathan Chase, and the doings of 
Olaf Pallak and his tools. 

“There is certainly a mystery here,” said Admiral 
Togo. “ I happen to know something of the Kri- 
metz and of this Captain Pallak, the brother of the 
rascal who has been working against Mr. Chase. I 
will send a message ashore and find out additional 
particulars of this affair and then let you know.” 

“ Thank you very much, sir,” replied Larry, and 
saluting again, he went about his business. 

Two days later the admiral sent for him, and for 
the first time in his life he entered the cabin of the 
Mikasa. It was substantially but not elaborately 
furnished. The admiral sat in an easy chair, with 
several documents in his lap. Behind him stood his 
orderly. 

“ I have received a report regarding the Krimetz,” 
said Admiral Togo. “ It was discovered that she 
was a Russian ship in disguise, and an effort was 
made to capture her. But she slipped away in a 
heavy mist, and nothing has been seen or heard 
from her since.” 

“ And my brother, and Captain Pennington ? ” 

“ The authorities of the seaport have investigated, 
and they found the boat in which your brother and 
his friend rowed around the harbor. Nothing has 
been found of any bodies in the harbor, and the 



For the first time in his life he entered the cabin of the 
Mikasa. — Page 244. 




LARRY BEFORE THE ADMIRAL 245 

general belief is that Captain Russell and Captain 
Pennington were made prisoners and carried off on 
the Krimetz” 

This was all Admiral Togo could tell, and Larry 
thanked him heartily for what he had done. The 
young sailor was dismissed, and went back to his 
quarters with downcast face. 

“ Well, it ain't as bad as it might be, Larry," said 
Luke, on hearing the new’s. “ As long as there is 
life there is hope, as the old sayin’ goes." 

“ But even if Ben and Gilbert are alive, think of 
their being in the power of such a villain as Olaf 
Pallak ! " 

“ I know it — it’s enough to make one sick. I’d 
like to know where the Krimetz c ; led to." 

“ Perhaps to Vladivostok." 

“ I don’t believe they’d dare to take Mr. Chase 
there. He’d raise a big muss as soon as he could 
get the ear of the authorities." 

The matter was discussed for a good hour, but 
nothing came of it. The news had a most depress- 
ing effect on Larry, and his heart felt like a lump of 
lead in his bosom as he went about his work on the 
ship. 

“ I think I’ll send a letter to Grace Chase," said 
he, that evening, and penned the communication in 
the morning, telling her what had occurred and ask- 


246 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

ing if she had heard from her father or from those 
on board of the Krimetz. 

“ It’s a good deal like looking for the pin in the 
haystack,” he said to Luke. “ But it’s the best I 
can do.” Larry also sent a letter to Dan Casey and 
Carl Stummer, thanking them for the interest they 
had taken in the affair. 

The middle of May had now passed and the 
weather was warm and delightful. Occasionally the 
thick mists hung over the sea, but the sun usually 
cleared the atmosphere in a few hours, so there was 
small danger of the Russian fleet slipping by the 
Japanese vessels on the watch for them. At night 
searchlights were used, especially in the Korean 
Straits, and dispatch boats were stationed at regular 
intervals along both the Korean and the Japanese 
coasts. 

One night came an alarm, but not from the out- 
side. Larry had just turned in and was sleeping 
soundly when Luke aroused him. There was a 
call to quarters, and then came the fire signal. 

“ What’s up ? ” queried Larry, rubbing his eyes. 
“ Has the enemy been sighted ? ” 

“ No. There’s a fire somewhere on this ship,” 
was the answer. 

“ Fire on the ship? Oh, Luke, I hope it doesn’t 
reach the magazines ! If it does ” 


LARRY BEFORE THE ADMIRAL 247 

“ We’ll be blown sky-high! ” finished the Yankee 
gunner. 

The fire-hose was already being stretched across 
the decks and the men were commanded to get their 
buckets and the rest of their equipment for fighting 
fire. It was only a small blaze, in a closet filled with 
waste and oil, but it burned fiercely. Water was 
pumped on it through a hose and the buckets were 
not needed. 

“ I wonder if they are getting the upper hand of 
it,” said Larry, after a painful wait of five minutes. 

“ Yes, the closet has been flooded,” came the 
word. Later on, the burnt waste was thrown over- 
board, and then a rigid investigation concerning the 
origin of the conflagration was instituted. But how 
it had started could not be discovered. 

“ Well, I think that rather a narrow escape,” was 
Larry’s comment, after the excitement was over. 
“ A fire on a warship filled with explosives is about 
as nice as a blaze in a fireworks factory.” 

“ Somebody must have been careless with a 
match, or else it caught from an electric wire,” an- 
swered Luke. “ I’ll wager Admiral Togo is mad.” 

The admiral was angry, but he did not show it. 
He talked the affair over with the captain of the 
warship, and as a consequence every man on board 
was cautioned about the use of fire of any kind. 


248 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

Then the matter was hushed up, so that it might not 
leak out and cause excitement throughout the rest 
of the fleet. 

During those days the whole civilized world was 
in doubt concerning the precise location of both the 
fleet under Admiral Togo and that under Admiral 
Rojestvensky. It was the intention of the Japanese 
commander to keep himself in the dark until pre- 
pared to strike a telling blow, and the Russian com- 
mander was doing his best to get to Vladivostok 
without being seen. Each was on the alert and 
each felt that a battle between them must mean a 
decisive victory for one side or the other. Should 
Japan win, Russia would virtually be swept from 
the seas ; and should the navy of the Czar be trium- 
phant, then all of the shipping interests of the 
Mikado would be at his enemy’s mercy. 


CHAPTER XXVII 


THE BATTLE OF THE SEA OF JAPAN 

“ The Russian fleet is coming at last! ” 

Such was the announcement which electrified 
everybody on board of Admiral Togo’s flagship on 
Saturday morning following the fire mentioned in 
the last chapter. The word flew from man to man, 
and in a few minutes all were in a state of subdued 
excitement. 

“Do you really think they are coming, Luke?” 
queried Larry. 

“ They are bound to come sooner or later, lad,” 
was the old gunner’s answer. “ I don’t think that 
Russian admiral can afford to stay in Chinese 
waters all the time. His supplies will give out and 
he won’t dare to call at any port for more, for fear 
of being refused.” 

The report that Admiral Rojestvensky was on the 
way was really true ; and here let us take a brief look 
at what had happened to the Baltic fleet during the 
time that the Japanese fleet was so anxiously await- 
ing its coming. 


249 


250 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


All told, the various vessels of the Czar had had 
long and difficult voyages in order to get anywhere 
near the object of their hopes. Those which had 
passed through the Mediterranean Sea and the Suez 
Canal had had various complications arise to stop 
their progress, and those to sail around the southern 
extremity of Africa had encountered some severe 
storms and not a few breakdowns of their ma- 
chinery. 

At last Singapore was reached, about April n, 
and something of a stop was made in the vicinity of 
the Anambas Islands, while one of the hospital ships 
took a run up to Saigon, in French Cochin China. 
Later still several cruisers were reported not far 
from Formosa, where they began to “ inspect ” the 
commerce, in search of Japanese merchant vessels. 

There came a loud protest from some of the mer- 
chant ships, and it was thought by some that Ad- 
miral Togo would sail down to Formosa, to give the 
Russians battle at that point. Had he done so, 
Admiral Rojestvensky might have taken advantage 
of the movement and slipped around the eastern 
coast of lower Japan and reached Vladivostok by 
means of the Sungari Strait. But the Japanese ad- 
miral was not to be caught napping. 

Finding he could not make Admiral Togo budge, 
the Russian commander resolved upon a direct 


THE BATTLE OF THE SEA OF JAPAN 25 1 

dash for Vladivostok by way of the Korean Straits, 
that narrow stretch of water lying between the 
lower coast of Korea and the western extremity ot 
Japan. The Straits are divided about in the center 
by the double island of Tsu with a channel on either 
side twenty-five to thirty miles in width. 

The Russian fleet advanced in three columns. On 
the Japanese side of the straits were the eight battle- 
ships, under the immediate command of the admiral, 
while on the west were the six armored cruisers. 
Between these and behind came the defense ships, 
the torpedo destroyers, and transports and colliers — 
thirty-two vessels all told, a beautiful sight and one 
full of inspiration. The warships were painted 
black and yellow (splendid targets for the Japanese 
gunners!), and from Admiral Rojestven sky’s flag- 
ship fluttered the signal : “We must have, not only 
a triumphant entry into Vladivostok, but must sink 
part of the Japanese fleet on the way.” 

Such was the situation early on the morning of 
May 27, 1905. The sea was covered with a thin 
mist when, at six o’clock, a Japanese scouting boat 
discovered the coming of the Russians at a point 
some forty miles below the Straits. Word was at 
once sent to Admiral Togo and it was this com- 
munication which aroused the Japanese commander 
to action. 


252 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

As yet it was not known which side of Tsu Island 
Admiral Rojestvensky would choose in making his 
dash for Vladivostok. Accordingly Admiral Togo 
ordered his fleet to leave Masampho and take up a 
position just north of the double island, which is 
divided in the center by a narrow and rocky chan- 
nel. From this position the Japanese fleet could 
swoop to the east or the west, as the occasion might 
demand. 

The morning wore away slowly, and long before 
noon the warships of the Japanese fleet were 
gathered where Admiral Togo wished them. From 
the mast of the Mikasa flew the signal : “ The 
destiny of our Empire depends upon this action. 
You are expected to do your utmost.” It was al- 
most like Nelson’s signal of old, “ England expects 
every man to do his duty.” How fully the lion- 
hearted sons of Nippon rallied to the call of their 
admiral history has told. 

Signals were now being flashed back and forth, 
and the wireless-telegraphy apparatus on board of 
the flagship was clicking away constantly. The 
news was coming in fast — the whole Russian fleet 
had appeared — the ships were cleared for action — 
they were approaching the Japanese coast — and 
then, at about noon, came the decisive notice, the 
Russian fleet had entered the eastern channel. 


THE BATTLE OF THE SEA OF JAPAN 253 

This was the word for which Admiral Togo had 
been waiting. No sooner had it come than he 
ordered his fleet to deploy across the northern mouth 
of the eastern channel, from Tsushima (Tsu Island) 
to Ikishima (Iki Island) close to the coast of Japan. 
For a distance of over forty miles the Japanese war- 
ships, big and little, lay in wait for the advance of 
the enemy. 

This was the trying moment for all, the moment 
when every heart beat wildly with expectation. The 
power of the sea both for Japan and for Russia was 
at stake. Which navy would prove the victor in the 
struggle ? 

On the Mikasa the men had long since cleared the 
ship for action. All the woodwork, rails, etc., on 
the deck had been taken down and stored away, so 
that there might be no flying splinters. The mag- 
azines had been opened, and every gun on board was 
loaded, with additional shells in the slings near-by. 
Down in the sick bay the surgeons were getting 
their cots in readiness and bringing out their surgi- 
cal instruments. The fire hose had been laid and 
also the smaller hose for washing out the big guns 
when they became overheated. The electrical fir- 
ing apparatus was carefully tested, and the range- 
finders in the tops looked to see that their instru- 
ments were in a condition to measure accurately 


254 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


how far the enemy was away, so that the guns might 
be elevated accordingly. 

“ How do you feel, Larry?” asked Luke as the 
two stood by their guns, with the others of the crew 
close at hand. 

“ I feel as if I’d like to be fighting,” was the 
prompt answer. “ I hate this waiting — it fairly 
racks one’s nerves.” 

“ Right ye are. I’d rather fight than wait any 
day. Wonder when the enemy will appear? ” 

A hasty dinner was served, and after that the time 
seemed to drag more than ever. But at half-past 
one o’clock came a call that brought every man on 
the flagship to his feet. 

“ The Russian ships are in sight ! They are head- 
ing this way ! ” 

The report was correct. The Russian fleet was 
headed by the Kniaz Suvaroif, Admiral Rojest- 
vensky’s flagship, and as she came a little closer she 
opened fire on the nearest of the Japanese warships. 

“ Man your guns ! ” was the call on the Mikasa , 
and less than a minute later came the order to fire. 
With hearts that were thumping madly Luke and 
Larry sprang to their piece, as did the rest of the 
crew. A broadside was delivered by the Japanese 
flagship, and it was ascertained afterwards that the 
Kniaz Suvaroff was hit in several places. 


THE BATTLE OF THE SEA OF JAPAN 255 

The firing from both flagships was the signal for 
a general “ opening up ” by all of the warships of 
both fleets, and a moment later came the thunder of 
hundreds of guns across the Sea of Japan, rolling 
and echoing back and forth, and enveloping each 
vessel in' a thick cloud of smoke. The firing of the 
Russian ships was faster than that of the Japanese, 
but the latter were by far more accurate in their 
aim. 

The main bodies of the two fleets were still 
several miles apart when the battle broke forth in all 
of its fury. Admiral Togo had stationed several 
of his admirals to the northeast and the southeast 
of the channel, and these now appeared, to hammer 
the Russian ships from the right, while the Japanese 
commander himself did the hammering from the 
left. The sun was in the west, and the wind was 
blowing towards the east, two things greatly in Ad- 
miral Togo’s favor, for it was hard for the Russian 
gunners to sight their pieces with the sun in their 
eyes, and it is always easier to fire “ down the wind ” 
than against it. 

“ This puts me in mind of our battle in Manila 
Bay ! ” cried Larry, as he helped to clean and reload 
the gun, which had been fired several times. “ I 
hope we do up the Russians as Dewey did the 
Dons.” 


256 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

There was small chance to say much, for the con- 
stant reports of the batteries were deafening. The 
gun discharged, it was thrown open at the breech- 
block, when a thick cloud of smoke and soot came 
rolling back, almost blinding them. Then the gun 
was cleaned once more, reloaded, and aimed accord- 
ing to the directions of the range-finders. It was 
no light task, and all of the men were bathed in 
perspiration and streaked with dirt. Many were 
stripped to the waist, especially those who had to 
work below. In the engine-rooms the thermometer 
registered a hundred and twenty degrees, and down 
by the fire holes the firemen and coal passers looked 
like sons of Old Nick as they fed in the coal as 
never before, for steam must be kept at a high pres- 
sure, in case of emergency. 

At the start the concentrated fire of the Japanese 
battleships was directed to the Russian flagship. 
Admiral Rojestvensky replied as vigorously as he 
could, but great holes were torn in the sides of the 
Kviiaz Suvaroff, and many of the gunners were 
killed or wounded. The flagship began to take in 
huge quantities of water and presently it was 
noticed that she listed heavily. 

“ She is going down ! ” cried more than one of- 
ficer, and feeling that this might be so, the Russian 
admiral transferred his flag to the Borodino , an- 


THE BATTLE OF THE SEA OF JAPAN 257 

other one of his great battleships, of 13,516 tons, 
and carrying a crew of seven hundred and forty 
men. Then the fire of the Japanese fleet was cen- 
tered on the new flagship, and in the furious bom- 
bardment the gallant Russian admiral, who certainly 
deserved a better fate, was badly wounded and had 
to be carried to the sick-bay. In the meantime the 
Russian Admiral Voelkersahm, the second in com- 
mand, had been killed in the conning tower of his 
ship, the Oslyabya. 

At the end of an hour’s hard fighting it was seen 
that the Russian fleet was thoroughly demoralized. 
In the running fight several of the big ships ran into 
some transports, and a collier got in the way of a 
broadside fire and was badly riddled. The rapid 
firing on the part of the Russians continued, and Ad- 
miral Togo’s ships were constantly hit, but, strange 
to say, none of the shots were of the sort to do any 
sinking, although many men were killed and many 
more were badly wounded. 

As soon as the fact was established that the Rus- 
sian ships were no longer in order, or battle forma- 
tion, Admiral Togo gave orders to press them, as 
much as possible, towards the Japanese coast, doing 
this so that the enemy might not be given a chance to 
“ take to his heels ” through the thick smoke which 
now hung over the Sea of Japan for miles. The 


258 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


Russians resisted desperately, and the battle broke 
forth in renewed fury. The fire directed against 
the Borodino was particularly effective, and at last 
the ship commenced to go down. In great haste 
Admiral Rojestvensky was transferred to the tor- 
pedo boat destroyer Bedovi, which then tried to 
escape to the north. But, later on, the Bedovi was 
overtaken by the Japanese destroyer Sazanami , and 
the Russian admiral was made a prisoner. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


ADMIRAL TOGO’S GREAT VICTORY 

To the one who is doing his share of the actual 
fighting, but little can be seen of a battle as a whole, 
and this was precisely the case with Luke and Larry. 
Both worked over their gun like Trojans, with the 
rest of the crew helping willingly. Several shots 
had passed through the side of the Mikasa and now 
a crash on the deck told that some portion of the 
upper work had been carried away. 

“ No two ways about it, this fight is gettin’ hot,” 
was the old Yankee gunner’s comment. Two hours 
had passed and the pace was beginning to tell upon 
him. But he had made several hits, which filled him 
with satisfaction. 

Larry would willingly have taken his friend’s 
place, but, so long as Luke was capable of serving, 
he knew this would be against orders. Again and 
again the gun was loaded and fired, and the smoke 
throughout the decks was so thick that scarcely any- 
thing at hand could be seen. There was a constant 


259 


26 o 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


cry for drinking water, and young jackies passed 
from gun to gun with their water pails. 

“ I want a drink myself,” said Larry, and watched 
for a water-carrier. The jackie was still twenty 
feet away when a shot came tearing through the 
flagship’s side, sending the iron and steel fragments 
in all directions. Three men were killed and among 
them the young water-carrier, who had his head 
severed from his body. Larry was partly stunned 
and when he recovered and saw what had happened 
to the fellow with the water pail he felt sick all 
over. 

“Warmer than ever, eh?” came from Luke. 
He shook his head. “ This is about three Battles o’ 
Manila Bay rolled into one.” 

“ The Russians seem to be running for it,” an- 
swered Larry, when he thought he could trust him- 
self to speak. 

“ Did you see that, Luke? I was waiting for him 
to give me a drink ! ” 

“ So was I. It’s the fortunes o’ war. We may 
be the next to go.” 

Finding he could not get a drink any other way, 
and being half choked by the smoke and soot, Larry 
got permission to leave the gun. 

“ Til bring you a drink, Luke! ” he cried, and dis- 
appeared down the deck, to be gone less than three 



“Luke! are you hurt?” he gasped. — Page 261 





ADMIRAL TOGO'S GREAT VICTORY 261 

minutes. He found a bucket and filled it to the brim 
for all hands. 

The sights to be seen were truly horrible. The 
wounded were being carried to the sick-bay and some 
were shrieking piteously. On the deck lay three 
dead sailors and an under officer, no one as yet hav- 
ing had time to remove the bodies. Twice Larry 
slipped in pools of blood and nearly pitched head- 
long, water bucket and all. At that instant he 
wished the battle was over and that he might never 
see another as long as he lived. 

He was still some distance from where he had left 
Luke when there came a shock and an explosion that 
almost took him from his feet. He staggered back 
and most of the water was spilt on the deck. He 
heard a cry for help. 

“ Luke, are you hurt? ” he gasped, and staggered 
forward through the smoke and dirt, to find his 
Yankee friend lying at the foot of the gun, with 
eyes closed and the blood pouring from the back of 
his head. Another of the gun crew lay a few feet 
off, stone-dead, with a portion of his skull blown 
away. 

Forgetful of all that was around him, and of 
his duty as a gunner’s assistant, Larry knelt 
down beside his faithful friend and caught 
the old Yankee up in his arms. As he did this 


262 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

Luke gave a gasp and opened his eyes for a 
moment. 

“ Luke, are you badly hurt ? Luke, answer me ! 
Oh, say that you are not badly hurt ! ” 

“ Larry ! I — I — on my head ! Giv — give me a 
— a — drink! ” 

“ I will ! ” The young sailor sprang up and was 
off like a shot. Soon he came back, and offered his 
friend a drink, but Luke had fainted. Then Larry 
bathed his head, and bound up the wound as best he 
could with a sleeve torn from his shirt. Soon the 
hospital corps came along and carried the old 
Yankee to the sick-bay. 

Larry wished he could go, too, but knew that his 
duty was to stand by the gun. Three of the crew 
were out of the fight, and he called for more men, to 
take their places. Then he took command, as was 
his duty, firing the piece almost as accurately as the 
old Yankee gunner himself. 

The Mikasa was moving slowly to the eastward, 
pressing two of the Russian battleships closer and 
closer to the Japanese coast. To the southward 
three cruisers were in a hot contest with some war- 
ships under Vice Admiral Kamimura, while over in 
the vicinity of Iki Island Admirals Uriu and Dewa 
were hammering at the rest of the Russian ships of 
war. It was certainly a battle royal. 


ADMIRAL TOGO’S GREAT VICTORY 263 

As Larry worked over bis gun, the perspiration 
pouring from his face, and his breath coming thick 
and fast, he could not help but think of Luke. What 
if his old friend of so many years’ standing should 
die from his wounds? The thought was a horrible 
one. And then his mind flashed to Ben and Gilbert. 
What if they were dead ? In that case he would be 
left alone, among these strange fighting men, thou- 
sands of miles from his native land. He prayed 
earnestly that such things might not be, that God 
would spare not only Luke but also the others to 
him. Then he remembered his duty, and gritting 
his teeth sprang in to labor over the big gun with in- 
creased vigor. 

In a battle of such magnitude it is impossible to 
give anything like the particulars of what actually 
occurred. After the fight was over, and it lasted 
from Saturday noon until Sunday night, the men 
on each ship that took part had their own story to 
tell — tales full of daring and valor both on the part 
of the Russians and of the Japanese, tales of un- 
thinkable horrors and sufferings, tales of the sinking 
of big ships, with hundreds on board, and of the 
blowing up by torpedo attacks of others — of brave 
rescues from death by fire or drowning — the quick 
annihilation of the flower of the Russian navy and a 
tremendous victory for Japan which was to have a 


264 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

world-wide influence in shaping the future course of 
the Mikado’s Empire. 

Briefly put, at least two if not three of the Rus- 
sian battleships were sunk on Saturday afternoon 
and several of the armored cruisers were likewise 
put out of the fight forever, while some smaller 
craft were run ashore to escape being blown up. As 
night came on the flotilla of Japanese torpedo boats 
rushed to the front, to finish the work of the heavier 
warships, and ere morning dawned the Alexander 
III and the Oslyabya were added to those that were 
doomed. From these Russian ships a few men 
were rescued, but the others sank to a watery grave. 

When the sun arose the battle was renewed by the 
large ships, and before long, so close were the Rus- 
sians pressed, the Nicholas I and the Orel were cap- 
tured with all on board, and soon after two coast 
defence ships were also taken. Other Russian ships 
were either torpedoed or else struck some sunken 
mines and went down, some off the coast of Japan 
and two off Tsu Island. 

Amid the smoke and excitement of such a contest 
every ship could not be watched, and the Russian 
Admiral Nebogatov tried his best to escape by flying, 
northward under all the steam he could command. 
But his speed was no match for the speed of the 
Japanese warships after him, and on Sunday he was 


ADMIRAL TOGO’S GREAT VICTORY 265 

overtaken near the Liancourt Islands. Only one 
vessel got away from the Japanese, but on Monday 
this warship ran on a reef, and her captain, after 
landing his crew, blew her up. 

While Nebogatov was flying to the northward, 
Vice Admiral Enquist essayed to flee to the south- 
ward. The smoke and the mist aided him, and 
rounding the islands of Japan, he steered for 
Manila, where he arrived six days later, with three 
cruisers, all more or less battered up and in need of 
repairs. These were promptly interned, as it is 
called, so that they could not be used again during 
the war. Another battered warship drifted into the 
harbor of Shanghai four days after the fight, and 
this had also to be put out of commission. Only the 
cruiser Almaz reached Vladivostok, in company with 
several destroyers of secondary importance. 

But the loss was not entirely on the side of the 
Russians. In that fearful contest, which has 
scarcely a parallel in modern or ancient history, 
three of Admiral Togo’s torpedo boats were sunk, 
and over eight hundred lives were lost. The Japa- 
nese battleship Asahi was literally riddled with 
shots, none of which, however, sunk the craft. 
Every Japanese warship had its killed or wounded, 
the number on board of the Mikasa being sixty- 
three. In the midst of the battle one of the ships 


266 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


had taken fire and the Japanese jackies had had to 
work desperately to save their lives and bring the 
conflagration under control. 

The actual loss in lives to the Russians will per- 
haps never be known. For days bodies were picked 
up on the bosom of the Sea of Japan and bits of 
wreckage were found floating around, some with 
jackies clinging to them, wild with thirst and starva- 
tion. Many escaped to trading ships that chanced 
to be in the vicinity, and secreted themselves or 
bought their liberty. As said before, the Russian 
ships had carried about 18,000 men. Of these it is 
estimated that not more than fifteen hundred es- 
caped. About thirty-five hundred were made pris- 
oners, and the others, about 13,000, were killed or 
drowned ! 

It was a fearful blow to Russian hopes. Much 
had been expected from the Baltic fleet, and now 
such expectations had proved in vain. The ships 
were gone, and many a Russian home, in the city 
and in the country, mourned the loss of a sailor lad 
who had gone forth never to return. Russian 
power on the high seas was a thing of the past, and 
her commerce was at the mercy of her enemy. 
Henceforth, if she was to fight at all, it must be on 
land only. 

In Japan the victory was hailed with mad mani- 


ADMIRAL TOGO’S GREAT VICTORY 2 67 

festations of joy. Tokio and the other large cities 
put on holiday attire, and great parades in honor 
of Admiral Togo and his gallant navy were held. 
Togo was held up to be, and rightfully, one of the 
greatest naval commanders of the age. 


CHAPTER XXIX 


ON THE HOSPITAL SHIP 

How long Larry worked over the gun he could 
scarcely tell, afterwards. On all sides other gun- 
ners and their crews were also at it, and the thunder 
of the big pieces was almost constant. The battle 
had turned into a running fight, and the Mikas a was 
plowing through the waters of the Sea of Japan at 
a rate of twelve miles an hour, crowding one of the 
Russian warships close up to the Japanese coast. 

The air throughout the gun deck was stifling, and, 
as it became thicker, one after another of the gun 
crews had to rush to the upper deck for a breath of 
fresh air. 

“ I can’t stand this any longer,” cried the young 
gunner, at last, and leaving the piece in charge of 
the men under him, he too went up, to fill his lungs, 
and to take a look at the great battle which was to 
play such an important part in the world’s history. 

On every side of the flagship he could see other 
war vessels, large and small, some under full steam 
and others stationary, each belching forth its torrent 
268 


ON THE HOSPITAL SHIP 269 

of shots and shells. The smoke hung low over the 
water, and the sun, shining through it, looked like 
a globe of blood. The sea was covered with wreck- 
age, and at a distance he made out the bodies of 
several dead sailors. High overhead circled some 
sea birds, uttering their cries of alarm. 

The Mikasa had been damaged greatly in her 
upperworks, but the wreckage which had come down 
on the deck had all been cleared away. In a shel- 
tered corner lay four men who had been overcome 
by the smoke and heat below, with a hospital at- 
tendant standing over them, doing what he could to 
revive them. 

“ Big, big fight,” said a voice at Larry’s elbow, 
and turning he saw Dalji standing there. The 
fellow was covered with perspiration and dirt, 
and from an ugly cut over his left ear the blood was 
running. 

“ Yes, it’s a big fight,” answered Larry. “ You 
are hurt,” he went on. 

“ Dat nodding — bit of shell hit me. Say, you 
t’ink we sink dem Russians ? ” 

“ It begins to look like it.” 

“ Your friend Luke, he hurt, eh ? ” 

“ Yes, poor Luke, I hope he gets over it.” 

“ Twelve men killed on dis ship — I see dem. 
Twenty-two men in doctors’ care already.” 


270 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

“ It’s certainly getting to be bloody, Dalji. I 
reckon it’s going to be a fight to the finish.” 

Having rested and gotten some of the smoke out 
of his lungs, Larry returned to the gun. Orders 
had come to cease firing, and no more shots were 
discharged for nearly half an hour. By this time 
they could see one Russian ship going down and a 
smaller craft was blown up. They were now after 
another Russian battleship, and soon the guns began 
to belch forth as before, and Larry was as hard at 
work as ever. 

When one more shot was fired, the young gunner 
noticed that a part of the mechanism of the piece did 
not run as smoothly as desired. He called for a can 
of oil and lubricated the part himself. He was just 
finishing up when there came a sudden lurch of the 
Mikasa which caused the oil from the can to spurt 
all over his clothing. 

“ What a mess ! ” he muttered, and wiped the oil 
off as best he could with some waste. Then he 
turned once more to the gun, and was soon firing as 
rapidly as any of the other gunners. 

The Russian battleship was now closely crowded 
and was making a last desperate stand to sink the 
nearest ships of her enemy. Shot and shell whistled 
all around the Mikasa and the Japanese flagship was 
struck at the bow and the stern. Despite the peril 


ON THE HOSPITAL SHIP 2?1 

of the situation Admiral Togo stood on the bridge, 
giving constant orders as to what should be done. 

At the end of half an hour it was plainly to be 
seen that at least a portion of the Russian command 
was badly beaten. The formation had gone to 
pieces and every Russian warship was firing to suit 
itself. 

“ I must have air again,” gasped Larry ; he was 
so choked up he could scarcely talk. There was a 
strong smell of gas around the guns and this made 
his head swim. 

As he staggered to the desk he heard a crash and 
an explosion. He swung around and slipped, fall- 
ing down on his side. At the same moment a fire- 
brand of some kind dropped down on him, setting 
fire to his oil-soaked clothing. 

The young gunner was so nearly overcome gen- 
erally that for the moment he did not realize his new 
peril. But then, as he saw the flames leap up from 
his clothing, he sprang to his feet with a cry of 
horror. 

“ Help ! ” he cried, and then had presence of mind 
enough to throw himself down again and roll over 
and over. 

“Jump overboard!” came the cry, in English. 
“ I will haul you out ! ” It was Dalji who uttered 
the words, and he almost pushed Larry over the side 


272 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

of the Mikasa. Then, with a splash, the young 
gunner sank beneath the waters of the sea. 

As Larry went down, he realized but one thing — 
he could not breathe and he was dying for a breath 
of air. He gave a gasp, clutched vainly at nothing, 
and came up floundering wildly. Then, just as 
somebody leaped down beside him, he lost conscious- 
ness. 

It was the faithful Dalji, almost a stranger to 
him, who came to the rescue and held him up, until a 
rope was let down for both. With the limp form 
of the young American over his shoulder, the Japa- 
nese held fast to the rope and allowed those on the 
deck of the flagship to draw him and his burden up. 

“ Is he dead? ” demanded the officer who was at 
hand. 

“ I don’t know, sir,” answered the Japanese, in his 
own language. “ He is burnt a little.” 

“ Take him to the sick-bay. Kawara and Diso, 
help carry the man.” And with his half-burnt cloth- 
ing dripping with water, Larry was taken to the 
hospital section of the ship and placed on a cot, 
where the doctors did what they could to revive him 
and care for his burns. 

What happened to Larry for a week after that 
was to him a good deal like a disordered dream. 
The thunder of guns sounded to him like the rolling 


ON THE HOSPITAL SHIP 


273 


of thunder, and ever and anon he seemed to see 
flashes of lightning which fell upon his clothing and 
set him on fire. Once he opened his eyes, to see 
Luke peering into his face. 

“ Feel better, lad? ” asked the old Yankee kindly. 

“ I — I don't know/' was the shaky answer. “ I 
— I’m all in a twist, Luke ! ” And then he went off 
again, and the thunder and lightning in his head 
continued, and sometimes he thought he was at the 
bottom of the sea, crawling, like a great crab, among 
the wrecks of innumerable warships. He took food 
and medicine when they were given to him, but did 
not realize what was happening, nor was he con- 
scious of being transferred from the Mikasa to a 
hospital ship of the Japanese fleet. 

Sixteen wounded men were transferred to the 
hospital ship and with that number went Luke, 
whose head was bandaged and who was in no con- 
dition to report for duty. Fortunately for the old 
Yankee, his wounds were not as serious as at first 
imagined, and the doctors told him that he would 
soon be as well as ever. On learning that Larry 
was hurt, he had insisted upon seeing the youth, and 
the doctors had thought best to humor him. 

When the battle was over, and victory was as- 
sured, there was great rejoicing on every warship 
belonging to Admiral Togo's fleet, and the com- 


274 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


mander himself received numerous messages of con- 
gratulation. But on the hospital ship all was quiet, 
for the patients were numerous and many of the 
cases were serious. The ship was sent to the north- 
ward, to collect more patients from the warships 
which had followed the Russians to the Liancourt 
Islands. 

At last came the day when Larry appeared to 
come to himself. He was very weak and as he 
opened his eyes he stared around in a bewildered 
fashion. Then he caught sight of his old friend, 
Luke, sitting at the end of the swinging cot, watch- 
ing him. 

“ Luke!” 

“ Larry ! So you have come around, have ye ? 
Thank heaven fo? that ! ” 

“ Whe — where am I ? ” 

“ On the hospital ship. You was clean knocked 
out, by smoke and by fire, an’ water. Don’t ye re- 
member ? ” 

“ Yes — but it’s pretty hazy — yet. Somebody 

saved me ? ” 

“ It was that Jap, Dalji, Larry. He’s a friend if 
ever there was one. He’s on the ship, too. Got a 
broken arm, at the very tail end o’ the battle.” 

“ Did we win? ” 

“ Yes, the Russian ships were knocked sky-high. 


ON THE HOSPITAL SHIP 


275 


It was a great victory, an’ some say it about means 
the end o’ the war.” 

“ I — I hope that’s true. I — I’m rather sick of 
fighting.” 

“ So be I, lad, I can tell you. After all, it ain’t 
exactly what it’s cracked up to be, this killin’ other 
human bein’s.” 

“ I — I don’t think I can get up.” 

“ Better not try. You need a long rest — and so 
do I.” 

Larry realized the truth of this, for the brief con- 
versation had already begun to make his head swim. 

“ Thank Dalji for me,” he murmured, and fell 
back and closed his eyes. 

Two days later the young sailor felt much better, 
and was able to sit up and partake of considerable 
nourishment. He asked again for Dalji and when 
the Japanese shuffled in, with his arm in a sling, 
greeted him warmly. 

“ I’m not going to forget what you have done for 
me Dalji,” he said. “ It was brave indeed.” 

“ Dat’s all right,” was the answer. “ I like you 
— you brave ’Merican to fight for my country. I 
no like to see you drown, or burn up eider.” 

“ How did you get your arm broken? ” 

“ I one big fool, dat’s how. I run up ladder to 
deck to see Russian ship sink — I fall off ladder an’ 


2 y6 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

break my arm. Wish I break arm fighting Rus- 
sians,” added Dalji mournfully. 

“ I am sorry for you,” answered Larry, and he 
gave the free hand of the Japanese a grip that meant 
much. 

On the next day twelve other wounded men were 
taken on board of the hospital ship. They reported 
that a heavy fight had occurred between a Russian 
cruiser and two Japanese destroyers some miles still 
further north, and that a destroyer had been badly 
injured. The hospital ship went in search of the 
crippled destroyer without delay. 

“ Luke, do you know if anything has been heard 
of Ben or Gilbert ? ” questioned Larry, on the day 
following. 

“ I haven’t heard anything, lad. But I wouldn’t 
be likely to hear, on this ship.” 

Larry shook his head and gave a long sigh. 

“ I wish we were all together again and this war 
was at an end.” 

“ Exactly my sentiments, too,” was the old 
Yankee’s response. 


CHAPTER XXX 


THE ENEMY MAKES AN OFFER 

Leaving Larry and Luke on the hospital ship, let 
us turn back and see how Ben and Gilbert fared 
after being made prisoners of the Pallaks on board 
of the Krimetz. 

As already stated, Ben had been knocked down 
with a boat-hook and he was still partly unconscious 
when he and the young Southerner were locked in 
the stateroom. 

As Gilbert bent over his chum, in an effort to re- 
vive him, he heard hurried tramping on the deck 
and the hasty setting of various sails. Then the 
Krimetz began to move away from the harbor, and 
he realized that they were being carried off, he knew 
not to where. 

The stateroom was almost dark and Gilbert had 
absolutely nothing to work with, so it was a long 
time before he got Ben to open his eyes and stagger 
to his feet. 

“ Gilbert, what does this mean ? ” asked the young 
captain, when he could speak. 


277 


2 78 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ It means we are prisoners, Ben.” 

“Where?” 

“ On that ship which Olaf Pallak’s brother com- 
mands.” 

“ Did they bring us down here ? ” 

“Yes.” 

“ Is the ship leaving the harbor? ” 

“ I presume so ; anyway she is under way.” 

“We must get out! ” murmured Ben, and stag- 
gered towards the door of the stateroom. It was 
locked and bolted from the outside, and he shook it 
in vain. 

“ Be quiet in there ! ” came a call, in Russian. 
“ Be quiet, or I’ll shoot! ” A sailor had been placed 
on guard and he carried a gun. 

“ Have you your pistol, Gilbert? ” was the whis- 
pered inquiry. 

“ No, they took all our firearms away from us. 
They had a rope around my wrists, but I managed 
to twist out of it.” 

“ What do you suppose will be the next move of 
these rascals ? ” 

“ Heaven alone knows, Ben. One thing is cer- 
tain, they are desperate characters.” 

“ They must know we were on a hunt for Mr. 
Chase.” 

“ More than likely.” 


THE ENEMY MAKES AN OFFER 279 

“ Do you suppose Mr. Chase is on this ship? ” 

“ He may be.” 

After this talk there was a long period of silence, 
during which both sat down on the stateroom berth 
to rest. The place was scantily furnished and made 
an excellent prison cell. There was one port-hole, 
about seven inches in diameter, and from this they 
could see nothing but the water and mist. 

“ I wonder what they’ll think of us on shore when 
we don’t come back? ” said Gilbert, at length. 

“ They’ll know something is wrong, Gilbert. 
Maybe they’ll pursue this ship. I hope they do.” 

Slowly the hours wore away, and by the rolling 
of the ship they knew that they were now well out to 
sea. Through the port-hole they saw that the mist 
was heavy, shutting out the sight of everything 
around them. 

“ This looks as if they were trying to elude pur- 
suit,” was Gilbert’s comment. “ They wouldn’t sail 
so recklessly in such a fog if they didn’t think it was 
necessary.” 

“ If they run on any rocks we’ll be smashed to 
bits,” returned Ben. 

With heavy hearts, they paced the stateroom and 
then sat down again. They could do absolutely 
nothing. At last Gilbert hammered on the door. 

“ I want to talk to Olaf Pallak! ” he called out. 


280 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

The guard did not understand his words, but he 
caught the name, and by another sailor sent word to 
Olaf Pallak that the prisoners demanded an inter- 
view. 

“ What shall you say to them ? ” asked Stephen 
Pallak curiously. 

“ Trust me to manage them,” returned Olaf Pal- 
lak craftily. 

“ You have not managed Nathan Chase very 
much,” was the captain’s cold reply. 

“ Wait ! He will yet do as I demand,” grumbled 
Olaf Pallak. 

He went below and paused at the door to the state- 
room in which Ben and Gilbert were imprisoned. 

“ Stay on guard,” said he to the sailor stationed 
there, and then threw the door open and confronted 
the two young Americans. 

“ Olaf Pallak, what does this mean ? ” demanded 
Gilbert. “ You have no right to make us prisoners.” 

“ You are prisoners of war,” answered Olaf Pal- 
lak, with a wicked smile. “ You not like that, I 
suppose ? ” 

“ Prisoners of war!” ejaculated Ben. “I don’t 
see how you make that out.” 

“ You belong to the Japanese army, not so? Very 
well, I am a Russian patriot. I intend to hand you 
over to the Russian authorities.” 


THE ENEMY MAKES AN OFFER 


28 


“ Is this a ship of war ? ” asked Gilbert. 

“ That is a question I have not to answer.” 

“ Is Nathan Chase on board? ” 

“ Another question I need not answer.” 

“ Perhaps you intend to turn him over to the Rus- 
sian authorities, too,” was Ben’s bitter comment. 

“ And why not ? He plotted to do my country 
harm — I can prove it. You Americans are all 
against Russia.” 

“ You will gain nothing by turning him and us 
over to the Russian authorities,” went on Gilbert. 

“We shall see. You are spies. In Russia they 
shoot spies,” added Olaf Pallak craftily. 

There was a pause, and the Russian gazed curi- 
ously at the two young Americans. 

“ You would like your liberty, not so? It would 
be far better than to be shot. How much would 
your liberty be worth to you ? ” 

The “ cat was out of the bag,” and what they had 
expected had come. He wanted them to purchase 
their liberty from him. 

“ The scoundrel ! ” muttered Ben. “ I’ll not give 
him a cent ! ” 

“Will you sell us our liberty?” questioned Gil- 
bert, just for the purpose of drawing the Russian 
out. 

“It might be possible.” Olaf Pallak paused. 


282 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ ’Tis this way : I have lost much, the war has cost 
me dear. At the beginning I gave liberally, for I 
thought my country needed it. Now poverty stares 
me in the face. Then why should I not make some- 
thing out of my country’s prisoners, even if I have 
to let them escape ? ” 

“ Then you’ll let us escape if we’ll pay the price? ” 
continued Gilbert. 

The Russian nodded. 

“ And what is your price? ” 

“ Ten thousand rubles for each of you.” 

“ Over fifteen thousand dollars.” 

Again the Russian bowed. 

“ You must take us for rich people.” 

“ I am aware that you are rich — I have made in- 
quiries. Captain Russell and his people are worth 
a great sum in American money, and you have a 
large interest in the Richmond Importing Company. 
To both of you playing, soldier is merely a pastime. 
You can well afford the sum I have mentioned.” 

“ What do you expect to get out of Nathan 
Chase?” 

At this the Russian grinned. 

“ A great deal more, if you must know — not less 
than thirty thousand rubles.” 

“ Do you think he will pay it? ” 

Olaf Pallak shrugged his shoulders. “ If he does 


THE ENEMY MAKES AN OFFER 283 

not it shall go hard with him. But his daughter 
will pay — she loves her father too much to refuse.” 

“ You are certainly a cold-blooded scoundrel ! ” 
cried Ben. “ I do not believe the Russian govern- 
ment will back you up in any of your doings.” 

“ You know nothing about it — you are ignorant 
of the real workings of my government. We do as 
we please. But that is not here nor is it there, as 
you say. Think over what I have said, and to- 
morrow I shall come for my answer.” 

“ We haven’t any money with us,” said Gilbert. 

“ You can easily get it — or you can give me an 
order for it. Then, when the money is collected, I 
will give you your liberty.” 

“ Will you let us talk the matter over with Nathan 
Chase?” 

The Russian frowned and meditated for a mo- 
ment. 

“ What good would that do ? ” 

“ It might help us to get the money, in case we 
made up our mind to take up with your offer.” 

“ In that case, I will let you speak to Mr. Chase.” 

“ Now?” 

“ No, to-morrow.” 

This was all Olaf Pallak would say, and a mo- 
ment later he left the stateroom. Ben called after 
him, asking for some drinking water, and presently 


284 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

a sailor appeared with pitcherful. Then the door 
was locked and bolted as before. 

“ Well, we have learned one thing,” said Gilbert, 
when they were alone. “ Mr. Chase must be on 
board of this ship.” 

“ Yes, but that doesn’t help us any,” answered 
Ben. “ He is probably as helpless as we are.” 

“ True.” 

“ Gilbert, you haven’t any idea of taking up with 
his cowardly offer.” 

“ No, unless I can’t possibly help myself.” 

“ What do you mean by that? ” 

“ I mean this, Ben : It would be better, as a last 
resort, to pay him something, than to run the risk 
of having him and his accomplices put us out of the 
way. For my part, I think he is capable of any 
dastardly deed.” 

“ You don’t think for a moment he would turn 
us over to the Russian government ? ” 

“ No, unless it might profit him in some way.” 

“ Perhaps he wouldn’t give us our liberty, even if 
we did pay him. For my part. I’d rather fight than 
pay,” and Ben’s face showed his determination. 

“ So will I fight, and hard, too.” 

They talked the matter over for an hour, but 
nothing came of it. Then the motion of the ship 
made them weary, and they lay down to rest. Late 


THE ENEMY MAKES AN OFFER 285 

at night they fell asleep, and neither awakened until 
a guard brought them some breakfast in the morn- 
ing. 

“ You are to come out,” said the guard, in Rus- 
sian, after they had finished their repast. “ Do not 
try to escape. We are on the sea and it will do no 
good.” 

They marched out of the stateroom, and the Rus- 
sian conducted them to the cabin of the Krimetz. 
Here they found Olaf Pallak and his brother. A 
moment later another guard appeared and behind 
him came Nathan Chase. 


CHAPTER XXXI 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 

Mr. Nathan Chase was a man well past middle 
age, short and somewhat portly. His face showed 
that he had undergone great mental as well as phys- 
ical suffering. 

“ Mr. Chase ! ” cried Gilbert, and stepped forward 
to grasp the merchant by the hand. 

“ Captain Pennington ! ” cried Nathan Chase. 
“ And Captain Russell, too ! They told me that you 
were prisoners on this ship, but I would not believe 
it.” He shook each by the hand. “ We are truly 
in the hands of the enemy.” 

“How have they treated you?” questioned the 
young Southerner. 

“ Very meanly. Olaf Pallak is little short of a 
brute. But can you tell me anything about 
Grace ” 

“ This talk must be stopped,” broke in Olaf Pal- 
lak harshly. “We came for business; not so, 
Stephen? ” 

Captain Pallak nodded. 

286 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 287 

“ Grace was well, the last we saw of her,” an- 
swered Gilbert. 

“ But she was greatly worried over your dis- 
appearance,” added Ben. “ We hunted for you, but 
could not find you. That is how we happened to 
be caught, just as we had located this ship.” 

“ Stop ! ” roared Olaf Pallak. “ Another word 
about private affairs and Nathan Chase shall be sent 
away and you shall not see him again.” 

“ Unless we can talk matters over we can do noth- 
ing,” returned Gilbert boldly. 

The two Pallaks glared at the three Americans 
and then held a whispered conversation in their own 
language. 

“ *Tis best we get to business, not so? ” said Olaf 
Pallak presently. “ The whole affair is very sim- 
ple. You wish your liberty ; we desire money. The 
question then is, will you pay for your liberty or 
not?” 

“ I have refused to pay them a dollar ! ” cried 
Nathan Chase. 

“ That was at the beginning,” came craftily from 
Olaf Pallak. “ You will now perhaps change your 
mind.” 

“ Why should I ? ” 

“ You hoped for help. We are now on the sea — 
you can get no help. We can starve you and throw 


288 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


you overboard, and who will be the wiser? Only 
the fishes.” And the Russian grinned suggestively. 

“Would you dare to make way with us?” de- 
manded Ben. 

“ As enemies of Russia, why not ? All of you 
are spies and worse. My country would give me 
credit for getting rid of spies.” 

“ If we promise you money, how are we to get the 
amount?” asked Gilbert, after another pause. 

“ Captain Pennington ” began Nathan Chase. 

“ Wait a minute, Mr. Chase. I want to learn just 
what this fellow proposes.” 

“ You must write letters, telling of your troubles 
and urging that the money be sent to a certain place, 
which I shall name. You must state in the letters 
that you are now held by the Russian government as 
spies and are condemned to be shot. For so much 
money you can obtain your liberty from your jailers 
and they will see you safely into Japanese territory.” 

“It is a dastardly plot!” cried Nathan Chase. 
“ I, for one, will not listen to it ! ” 

“ Do not be so hasty,” came from Gilbert. He 
looked knowingly at the merchant and at Ben. 
“ Perhaps we can arrange this to everybody’s satis- 
faction.” 

“ You will pay then ? ” questioned Olaf Pallak, 
with a faint gleam of triumph in his eyes. 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 289 

“ Perhaps. Let us get down to details, Pallak. 
Let us know exactly what you want and how you 
want it paid, and how you are willing to guarantee 
our liberty. ,, 

Thinking he had won, the Russian and his brother 
unfolded their plan in detail. Each of the Amer- 
icans was to write a letter to his people telling a tale 
of how he had been captured as a spy by the Rus- 
sians and been condemned by a certain military 
commander to death. They were to state that their 
head jailer was a Pole, who, though under the 
authority of the Czar, hated Russia, and was willing 
to promise them their liberty for a certain sum of 
money — the jailer to use the money in leaving the 
country for his own safety. 

It was a nicely devised plot, and Olaf Pallak and 
his brother had taken every precaution to save them- 
selves from ruin should exposure come. By writ- 
ing the letters the Americans were to acknowledge 
that they were spies, and thus beyond the protection 
of ordinary laws. 

“ Supposing you let us talk this over among our- 
selves? ” said Gilbert at last. “ We cannot come to 
any decision unless we can do this. We must ar- 
range about the money and many other things.” 

He talked so smoothly that Olaf Pallak was 
thrown off his guard, and the Russian finally con- 


29O UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

sented to allow them the use of an after-cabin, with 
two staterooms adjoining. 

“ The two captains will pay,” he said to his 
brother. “ And they will persuade Nathan Chase 
to pay also. It was a glorious thing for us that we 
made prisoners of the captains. The spy scheme 
will work well.” And Stephen Pallak agreed with 
this conclusion. 

The door to the after-cabin was locked and a 
guard was stationed near-by. The guard could not 
understand a word of English, so the three Amer- 
icans could say what they pleased after the Pallaks 
had taken their departure. 

“ The scoundrels ! ” murmured Gilbert. 

“ Then you do not believe in paying them any- 
thing?” questioned Nathan Chase quickly. 

“ Not a cent, Mr. Chase — excepting as a very last 
resort.” 

“ That is exactly how I have felt about it. What 
sort of an age are we living in that we should agree 
to such a hold-up as this ? It is outrageous ! ” 

“ The question is, what are we going to do about 
it?” came from Ben. “I don’t believe in giving 
up any money — and, let me add, I don’t think they’ll 
give us our liberty even if we do pay up — they are 
too afraid of getting into trouble afterwards — when 
this war is at an end.” 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 29I 

“ If we were near the coast, we might make a dash 
for liberty,” suggested the young Southerner. 

Nathan Chase was anxious to learn about his 
daughter, and they told him what they could about 
her and also related what had been done in the hunt 
after he disappeared. In return he related his own 
story, telling how he had been carried off, first to 
the mountains and then to the Krimetz. He had 
been much abused, and twice they had threatened to 
shoot him. 

The day went by and only the guard came near 
them and the cook of the ship with some food. 
Evidently the Pallaks had determined to let them 
talk the matter over to their hearts’ content. 

On the following day there was evidently some 
excitement on the deck. A Japanese warship was 
in sight and the Pallaks were afraid the Krimetz 
would be stopped and searched. But as luck would 
have it, the warship was in a hurry to reach a certain 
port and paid little attention to them. 

Late in the afternoon of the next day, Olaf Pallak 
came in for a talk and the Americans treated him as 
nicely as possible. 

“ We have not yet decided on how to raise that 
money,” said Gilbert. “ We’ll try to fix it up in a 
day or two.” 

“ I can wait,” said Olaf Pallak, and withdrew. 


292 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


The Americans were waiting for something to 
turn up — what they could not tell. They tried 
several times to question the guard, but could get 
nothing out of the fellow. 

That night, just before retiring, they heard some 
talk between Captain Pallak and his first mate. 
They listened intently and learned that the Krimetz 
was to make a brief landing the next day at noon. 

“We must try to escape,” said Gilbert, and so it 
was arranged. In order to throw their captors off 
their guard, all three pretended to be sick. 

“ You have given us vile food,” said Ben. “ I 
must be poisoned ! ” and he gave a deep groan, and 
so did the others. 

Alarmed, for fear his prisoners might die on his 
hands, Olaf Pallak did what he could to relieve their 
pretended sufferings. They kept to their berths, 
and the guard was, for the time being, relaxed. 

It was not until the middle of the afternoon of the 
next day that the Krimetz came in sight of a some- 
what barren coast. The Pallaks wished to go 
ashore for some private purpose and the ship was 
left in charge of the first mate. The prisoners pre- 
tended to be sick still and but little attention was 
paid to them. 

“ Now is our chance!” whispered Gilbert, when 
they found themselves alone, and he arose, and the 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 


293 


others followed his example. Seeing no guard 
around, they stole into the main cabin and then up 
the companionway leading to the main deck. A 
boat had put off for the shore, containing the Pal- 
laks and two sailors. 

“ What’s the next move? ” asked Ben in a whis- 
per. 

“ There is a boat over yonder. Wonder if we 
can get it over the side? ” 

No sailors were looking, the majority being in the 
forecastle. With all possible speed they lowered the 
rowboat and threw in the oars. Then they slid 
down on a rope and took seats in the craft. 

“ We can go the same way they did,” whispered 
Nathan Chase. “ Remember, they are armed and 
we are not.” 

“ What fools we are not to look around for 
weapons,” came from Gilbert. 

“ Let us row away from the shore. The sea is 
calm enough, and we can make for that point above 
here. Once around the point we’ll be out of their 
sight.” 

This was Ben’s advice, and without delay they 
started to carry it out. He and Gilbert were at the 
oars while Nathan Chase did what he could to steer 
the craft. 

Scarcely a hundred yards were covered, when 


294 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


there came an alarm from the ship. Looking back 
they saw three sailors at the rail, shaking their fists 
wildly. Then one of the sailors rushed off, to re- 
appear with a gun. 

“ They are going to shoot us ! ” cried Ben. 

Bang! went the gun, but instead of being aimed 
at the Americans it was fired into the air as a signal. 
Then a second shot rent the air. 

The Pallaks heard the shots just as they were 
landing. They immediately sprang into their boat 
again and headed for the ship, telling the sailors to 
row with all possible speed. As they came closer 
the voice of the first mate hailed them. 

“ They have escaped ! ” he roared. “ The dogs 
have gotten away in a small boat ! There they go! ” 

“ Ha! so that is their plan! ” ejaculated Olaf Pal- 
lak. “ They were not sick at all ! After them ! ” 
And he took hold of an oar himself, and so did his 
brother. 

With four against them, it was impossible for the 
Americans to out-distance their enemy, and slowly 
but surely the other rowboat drew closer. Then 
Olaf Pallak flung down his oar and drew a pistol, 
while the captain of the Krimetz did the same. 

“ Stop ! ” called out Olaf Pallak. “Stop, or I 
shall shoot ! ” 

Feeling the rascal would keep his word, they 


A DARING DASH FOR LIBERTY 295 

stopped rowing and in a moment the second boat 
came up. In the meantime a third boat was coming 
from the ship. Thus the Americans were soon sur- 
rounded, and then there was nothing left to do but 
to go back to the Krimetz. 

“ You shall not escape again! ” cried Olaf Pallak 
vindictively. “ I shall have you watched day and 
night. Dogs, to deceive me as you did ! ” 


CHAPTER XXXII 


THE RESCUE — CONCLUSION 

For several days after their attempt to escape 
the Americans saw little of Olaf Pallak. He came 
to them once, denouncing them roundly and threat- 
ening them with instant death should they try to 
escape again, and then left them in charge of two 
guards, who remained on duty both day and night, 
one man relieving the other. 

To show his hatred of them, the Russian ordered 
the cook to give them but scanty portions of food 
and this of the poorest quality. As a consequence 
they could not eat all that was set before them and 
began literally to starve. 

“ He is going to force us into submission,” was 
Gilbert’s comment. “ I suppose he thinks that after 
a month or so of this we’ll be willing to do almost 
anything to gain our liberty.” And this surmise 
was correct. 

As the days went by the prisoners wondered 
where they were being taken. They were not al- 
lowed to go on deck and the guards refused to speak 
296 


THE RESCUE— CONCLUSION 297 

to them, having been warned not to do so by the 
captain of the Krimetz. 

“ This is simply awful,” said Ben one day. “ Gil- 
bert, how long do you think you can stand this ? ” 

“ Not much longer, Ben.” 

“ Perhaps after all, we would have done better 
had we purchased our liberty,” said Nathan Chase 
sadly. 

“ I wouldn’t trust the Pallaks, Mr. Chase. They’d 
take our money and that would be the end of it.” 

One night, just as they were retiring, they heard 
the booming of cannon at a distance. All sprang 
from their berths and listened intently. 

“ What can that mean ? ” questioned the merchant. 

“ It means that there is a fight on somewhere,” 
answered the young Southerner. 

“ A fight on sea or on land ? ” 

“ I cannot tell that.” 

“ Perhaps it’s a bombardment,” suggested Ben. 
“ It sounds as if it was a good many miles away.” 

The cannon firing continued for perhaps a quarter 
of an hour and then died away in the distance. They 
questioned the guard, but he merely shrugged his 
shoulders and kept quiet. 

The next day opened clear, but towards noon it 
became misty and the sun went under a bank of 
clouds. Just as darkness settled over the waters 


298 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


they heard more cannon firing, this time much closer 
than before. 

“ It must be a fight on the sea,” said Ben. “ I 
wish we could see it.” 

Soon the firing was closer, and then of a sudden 
they heard a crash on the deck. A shell from one of 
the warships had carried away the mainmast of the 
Krimetz! It may be mentioned here that it was 
afterwards ascertained that the shell had come from 
a Russian cruiser trying to escape the onslaught of 
two Japanese warships. 

The crash on the deck was followed by a cry of 
pain and terror. One sailor was hit by the wreck- 
age and knocked overboard, and Olaf Pallak was 
carried down and completely covered. 

“ Clear away the wreck ! ” cried Captain Pallak. 
And then he ran to where his brother had disap- 
peared, under some spars and sails. When one of 
the heaviest of the spars was raised Olaf Pallak was 
found underneath, with a number of his ribs crushed 
in, and gasping for breath. 

“Olaf, are you much hurt?” cried Captain 
Pallak, but instead of answering the injured man 
fainted dead away. 

It was a time of great excitement, and while Olaf 
Pallak was carried to the cabin some sailors dragged 
the fellow who had gone overboard to the deck. 


THE RESCUE — CONCLUSION 


2 99 


Then the men started to cut away the wreckage as 
best they could. 

In the midst of the confusion came another shot, 
and now they saw a Japanese warship loom up 
through the mist and not far away the Russian 
cruiser. The cannon boomed constantly, and a shot 
struck the Krimetz near the stern, carrying away a 
portion of the steering-gear. The Russian cruiser 
was getting the worst of the fight, and was running, 
for a shore a mile away. 

With so much going on, the men set to guard the 
three Americans forgot what they were doing and 
ran on deck, thinking the Krimetz was about to sink. 
No sooner had they gone than Gilbert and Ben put 
their shoulders to the cabin door and burst it open. 

“Let us arm ourselves this time!” cried the 
young Southerner, and caught up a cutlass lying on a 
table. From the wall Ben got another cutlass, and 
Nathan Chase picked up an iron bar that chanced to 
be handy. 

They were about to make for the deck when the 
captain of the Krimetz confronted them. As soon 
as he realized what was going on, Stephen Pallak 
drew a pistol. 

“ Back with you, dogs ! ” he cried in Russian, but 
instead of retreating, Gilbert knocked the pistol from 
his hand with the cutlass and then all pressed for- 


300 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

ward, hurling the Russian captain to the floor. Ben 
picked up the pistol and placed it at Stephen Pal- 
lak’s head. 

“ Don’t move, or you’ll pay the penalty ! ” he 
cried, and the rascally Russian cowed down, badly 
frightened. 

They now heard a deep groan, and turning saw 
Olaf Pallak lying on the berth of a side stateroom. 
A sailor had been attending him, but in fright the 
fellow had run to the deck. 

“What’s the matter?” asked Gilbert, coming 
closer. 

Olaf Pallak could not speak, but continued to 
gasp, meanwhile rolling his eyes wildly. 

“ He is hurt,” whined Captain Pallak. “ The 
spars came down on him. I do not think he can 
live.” 

“ Then go in and attend him,” said Gilbert, in a 
softer voice. 

Captain Pallak entered the stateroom, and they 
closed and locked the door on the brothers. Amid 
the constant booming of cannon they ran to the up- 
per deck. 

Here the confusion was greater than ever. With 
the steering-gear gone, it was impossible to manage 
the Krimetz, and the ship was rolling in the long 
swells of the sea, directly between the two warships. 


THE RESCUE — CONCLUSION 3OI 

Shots were flying on all sides, and the Krimetz was 
struck again, this time just below the water line. 

“ Our ship is sinking! ” cried the Russian sailors, 
and made a wild dash for the small boats. Before 
they could be stopped, they were over the sides, and 
seeing this, the first mate followed, leaving the ship 
to the Pallaks and the three Americans. 

“ Do you really think she is sinking ?” cried 
Nathan Chase. 

“ I don’t know,” returned Ben. “ But we have 
been struck, that’s certain.” 

“ And she is rolling fearfully,” added Gilbert. 

“If the ship is really going down we can’t leave 
the Pallaks to die like rats in a trap,” came from 
Ben. 

“ Olaf Pallak was willing to let us die that way,” 
answered his chum grimly; nevertheless, he rushed 
below and threw open the stateroom door. 

“ Your men have left the ship ! ” he cried. 

“ Left the ship ! ” gasped Captain Pallak. 

“ Yes. We have been struck and may be sink- 
ing.” 

Stephen Pallak groaned in spirit and ran to the 
deck. The mist was sweeping away, and closer than 
ever loomed the Japanese warship, followed by an- 
other vessel of Admiral Togo’s fleet. 

“ The Japanese ! ” cried the captain of the Kri- 


302 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

metz. And now the last of his courage seemed to 
desert him. 

“ Captain Pallak, you must consider yourself a 
prisoner of war ! ” said Gilbert firmly. “ And your 
brother, if he lives, must also consider himself a 
prisoner. Ben, signal to the Japanese warship for 
help, if you can.” 

“ This — on my own ship ! ” came faintly from the 
Russian captain. 

“ Yes. The tables have turned. We claim this 
ship as a prize of war.” 

“ She is a German ship, flying the German 
flag ” 

“ She is nothing but a Russian vessel, and we can 
prove it. Do you surrender, or must we make you 
a prisoner? ” 

Stephen Pallak wanted to argue, but Gilbert cut 
him short, and in the end the Russian went below, to 
look after his wounded brother. In the meantime 
one of the Japanese warships went after the Rus- 
sian cruiser and the second ship steamed slowly to 
the side of the Krimetz. Then a small boat was put 
off and a Japanese officer and eight men came on 
board of the sailing ship. 

As best they could Nathan Chase and the two 
young captains explained the situation. A hasty 
examination was made, and it was found that the 


THE RESCUE — CONCLUSION 303 

hole below the water line could be plugged up and 
the water pumped out of the Krimetz . It was also 
learned that the steering-gear could be temporarily 
repaired and the ship thus sailed to the nearest Japa- 
nese port. 

It was found that Olaf Pallak was in a serious 
condition and not likely to live any great length of 
time. He could speak only in gasps. 

“We have a hospital ship not many miles from 
here/’ said the Japanese officer who had come on 
board. “ He can be transferred to that. Perhaps 
the doctors there may be able to do something for 
him.” 

A prize crew was placed on board of the Krimetz, 
and an hour later the ship was on the way, minus her 
mainmast and a good share of her rigging. Direc- 
tions were given for reaching the hospital ship, and 
then the Japanese warship followed after her sister 
ship, to continue the pursuit of the Russian cruiser. 

“ This is what I call a sudden turn of affairs,” 
said Gilbert, a happy smile spreading over his face. 

“ It proves the truth of the old saying that the 
darkest hour is just before the dawn,” answered Ben. 
He, too, felt wonderfully light-hearted. 

“ I am impatient to reach land and learn some- 
thing about my daughter and my business affairs,” 
put in Nathan Chase. 


304 


UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 


“ I wonder if those sailors who left the ship will 
escape,” went on the young Southerner. 

“ And the Russian cruiser,” added Ben. Long 
afterwards they heard about the sinking of the 
cruiser. The sailors were picked up by a Japanese 
warship and made prisoners. 

About noon of the next day the Krimetz came in 
sight of the Japanese hospital ship and signals were 
set for assistance. Olaf Pallak was transferred to 
the hospital ship, and with him went his brother, as 
a prisoner, and also the three Americans. 

As soon as they were transferred, Ben and Gilbert 
heard that there were some Americans on the hospi- 
tal ship. Curious to learn whom they might be, they 
obtained permission to visit the different wards. 
And there they came upon Larry, lying on his 
swinging cot, with faithful Luke sitting beside 
him. 

“ Larry ! ” burst out Ben, and sprang to his 
brother’s side. 

“ Ben ! ” was the faint answer, and Larry put up 
both arms, and then and there the brothers hugged 
each other. Gilbert also came in for a warm greet- 
ing, and Luke was not forgotten. 

“ This is simply wonderful ! ” exclaimed Ben. 
“ I never dreamed you would be here.” 

“ And we certainly didn’t expect to see you,” 


THE RESCUE— CONCLUSION 305 

came from the old Yankee gunner. “ Where did ye 
rain from, I’d like to know? ” 

“ It’s a long story,” came from Gilbert. “ But 
say,” he added earnestly, “ doesn’t it feel good to 
be together again ? ” 

“Good?” repeated Larry. His face took on a 
contented smile. “Why, it makes me feel better 
already ! ” 

“ You have suffered, Larry,” said Ben softly. 

“ Yes, but I shan’t mind it — now.” 

Here let me add a few words and then bring to a 
close this story of the war adventures of three young 
Americans. 

As soon as they were able to do so, Ben and Gil- 
bert told their story, as did also Nathan Chase, and 
then Larry and old Luke related their own tale in 
detail. 

Fortunately for Larry, his burns proved to be not 
as bad as anticipated and in a few weeks he felt 
quite like himself again. Luke also mended rapidly, 
and both would have rejoined the Mikas a at some 
time in the near future had not fate overtaken the 
flagship in a most unexpected fashion. While lying 
at anchor she was, in some manner not fully ex- 
plained, blown up, and went down with almost her 
entire crew on board. Among those who met their 


30 6 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

fate at that time was the loyal-hearted Dalji and also 
Kino Nana, the latter having come on board only 
two days previous. Luckily Admiral Togo did not 
participate in the great tragedy, which cast a tem- 
porary gloom over the entire Japanese nation. 

From the doctors on the hospital ship it was 
learned that Olaf Pallak could not live more than 
a week at the longest. When the man himself heard 
of this he asked for Nathan Chase, and later on, for 
Ben, Gilbert, and Larry. 

“ I have done wrong — I know it now,” said the 
dying Russian. “ I ask all of you to forgive me be- 
fore I die.” And they did forgive him, for which 
he seemed grateful. He made a full confession to 
Mr. Chase, and told the merchant where he could 
get back the money that had been stolen in various 
ways. Just six days later he died, and was buried 
at sea. 

Stephen Pallak was much downcast over the loss 
of his brother and also over the capture of his ship, 
in which he had the most of his money invested. He 
was put in confinement after his brother’s death, and 
later on sent to a Japanese prison until the end of the 
war. 

When her father returned home, Grace Chase 
was overjoyed, and she sent warm letters to Ben, 
Gilbert, and Larry, thanking them for all they had 


THE RESCUE — CONCLUSION 307 

done for her parent. Mr. Chase was also grateful, 
and when he got his affairs straightened out once 
more, sent to each a costly gold watch and chain, 
with a charm suitably engraved. 

As already mentioned, the loss of her fighting 
ships was a telling blow to Russia. Her power on 
the sea was gone, and now the Japanese began to 
close in on her armies once more, making the future 
'look blacker than ever. 

The world wanted peace, and through the good 
offices of this country a peace conference was ar- 
ranged, to take place at the Portsmouth (N. H.) 
Navy Building. The conference proved a long- 
drawn one, but a treaty of peace was signed on Sep- 
tember 5, 1905. By this treaty Russia gave up her 
interest in the Liao-Tung peninsula, including Port 
Arthur and other valuable places, and recognized 
Japan’s right to dominate Korea. She also agreed 
to evacuate Manchuria in the near future, and gave 
to Japan the lower half of Sakhalin Island. A large 
part of the Manchurian railroad was left in the hands 
of Japan, and a strong commercial agreement was 
made between both nations, which, in the future, 
may be productive of much good. 

With the end of the war in sight, Ben and Gilbert 
readily obtained their release from the army, 
and left, after bidding Major Okopa an affectionate 


308 UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

farewell. The major was now quite himself 
again. 

“ I shall be sorry to lose you,” said he. “ I shall 
remember you as long as I live.” 

“ And we’ll remember you,” answered the two 
young captains. 

For the time being Carl Stummer and Dan Casey 
remained with the Japanese army, for each was get- 
ting good pay as an officer of the sharpshooters. 
They were glad to hear of the escape of Ben and 
Gilbert and wished their old comrades-in-arms 
well. 

When Ben and Gilbert left the army, Larry and 
Luke obtained their release from the navy, and all 
four met at Nagasaki, after a visit to the Chases at 
Port Arthur. Wounds and hurts were now a thing 
of the past, and the whole party was in the best of 
spirits. 

“ I’ve got news,” said Larry to the others, on the 
third day after the arrival at Nagasaki. “ The 
Columbia is in port from Manila, and Captain Pons- 
berry says he is going to sail soon for San Francisco, 
with a short stop at Manila.” 

“ And you want to go along? ” put in Ben quickly. 

^ “ That’s the truth, if you will go too. Why not ? 
It will be a fine trip, and will give us all a good 
chance to rest up.” 


THE RESCUE— CONCLUSION 309 

“ I’m going sure,” came from Luke. “ Ain’t no 
better ship afloat for me nor the old Columbia.” 

“ I’d like the trip first-rate,” put in Gilbert. “ And 
I really ought to go to Manila and to San Francisco, 
too, for the Richmond Importing Company. Now 
this war is about over we want to get into shape for 
some big business.” 

^ “ Then let us go ! ” cried Ben. 

And so it was agreed that they should make their 
trip to their native land with their old friend Cap- 
tain Ponsberry ; and here we will leave them and say 
good-bye. 


THE END 











































SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME TWO 

UNDER THE MIKADO'S FLAG 

Or Young Soldiers of Fortune 


B20 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 


“T TNDER the Mikado’s Flag” relates the adventures of two young 
Americans in Korea and Manchuria during the outbreak of the 
great war between Russia and Japan, one of the leading characters being 
Gilbert Pennington, the hero of “On to Pekin,” and the other, Ben 
.? Russell, who with his brothers, Larry and Walter, is so well known to the 
;i thousands of readers of the famous “Old Glory Series.” It closes with 
the great Battle of Liao- Yang, and is as valuable for the information 
i conveyed as it is interesting as a story. The boys of the whole country 
have been expecting Mr. Stratemeyer to give them a book on the Japanese 
war, and he has responded by one of his very best. 


Mr. Stratemeyer is undoubtedly improving very greatly on the average 
>■; book for boys. — Star, St. Louis , Mo. 

He knows how to attract and hold boy readers. — Evening Standard , 

• New Bedford , , Mass. 

All the boys know Mr. Stratemeyer’s stories, which are none the less 
{thrilling for giving a considerable knowledge of geography and history. — 
\ Christian Work , New York. 

The demands of boy readers are peculiar, and the author who can sat- 
isfy them, not once or twice, but uniformly, must possess rare ability in 
an extremely difficult field. Such an author is Edward Stratemeyer.— 
Sunday News , Newark , N. J. 


PAN-AMERICAN SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME ONE 

LOST ON THE ORINOCO 

Or American Boys in Venezuela 

I2mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 

T HIS volume tells of five American youths, who, with 
their tutor, sail from New York to La Guayra, 
touching at Cura9ao on the way. They visit Caracas, the 
capital, Macuto, the fashionable seaside resort, go west- 
ward to the Gulf of Maracaibo and lake of the same name, 
and at last find themselves in the region of the mighty 
Orinoco, and of course they have some exciting expe- 
riences, one of which gives name to the book. Just the 
book boys and young men should read, in view of the 
general interest in matters Pan-American. 

Its pictures of South American life and scenery are novel and instruc- 
tive. — The Literary World , Boston. 

The scenes described are of the sort to charm the hearts of adventur- 
ous boys. — The Outlook , N. Y. 

VOLUME TWO 

THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS 

Or American Boys in the West Indies 

12mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 

T HIS is a complete tale in itself, but has the same 
characters which have appeared so successfully in 
“ Lost on the Orinoco.” The boys, with their tutor, sail 
from Venezuela to the West Indies, stopping at Jamaica, 
Cuba, Hayti, and Porto Rico. They have numerous ad- 
ventures on the way, and then set out for St. Pierre, Mar- 
tinique, where they encounter the effects of the eruption 
of Mt. Pelee, and two of the boys are left on a raft to shift 
for themselves. Life in the West Indies is well portrayed, 
and the tale will appeal to many an older person as well 
as to the boys* 


PAN-AMERICAN SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME THREE 

YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS 
Or American Boys in Central America 

306 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1,25 

T HIS is a complete tale in itself, but forms a new vol- 
ume in the surprisingly popular Pan-American series. 
It relates adventures in a tour covering Nicaragua, Costa 
Rica, and the Isthmus of Panama. The party travel the 
various canal routes, and have a number of highly inter- 
esting experiences. The volume contains a vast amount of 
timely information, and will be read with interest by young 
men as well as boys. 

It is a splendid book that will not only amuse and interest the reader, 
but will supply him with most valuable instruction and information upon 
subjects which every young American who takes pride in his country, and 
what pertains to it, ought to know. — American Boy. 

VOLUME FOUR 

YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON 
Or American Boys in Brazil 

300 pages 12mo Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

A N absorbing tale of sight-seeing and adventures in 
Brazil. The five boys and their tutor travel the 
whole seacoast from Rio de Janeiro to Para, and then 
move up the Amazon into the rubber country and beyond. 
The volume is filled with pen-pictures of life as it exists 
in Brazil to-day, and will be heartily enjoyed by all young 
people. 

The Pan-American Series by Edward Stratemeyer has been declared by 
the boys of this country to be the most up-to-date of all reading for the 
young. Filled with action and good fellowship. — Waverley Magazine. 

Mr. Stratemeyer has acquired the art of weaving a good deal of solid 
information with his web of startling adventure . — San Francisco Bulletin. 


COLONIAL SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 
FIRST VOLUME 

WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST 
Or a Soldier Boy's Battles in the Wilderness 

12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute 302 pages $1.25 

W ASHINGTON’S earlier life 
has received scant attention, 
notwithstanding its possibilities. Mr. 
Stratemeyer has woven into an excel- 
lent story something of Washington’s 
youthful experience as a surveyor, 
leading on to the always thrilling 
Braddock’s defeat. The hero, David 
Morris, is several years younger than 
Washington, with whom he becomes 
intimately associated. Pictures of 
pioneer life are given ; scenes with 
friendly Indians ; and old-time games. 

SECOND VOLUME 

MARCHING ON NIAGARA 

Or The Soldier Boys of the Old Frontier 

12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T HIS tale is complete in itself, but many of its charac- 
ters have appeared in “With Washington in the 
West.” 

The story relates the doings of two young soldiers who 
join the Colonial forces in a march on Fort Niagara, during 
the time of the war with France, when the whole territory 
between the Blue Ridge and the Great Lakes was in a 
state of unrest. Many side lights are thrown into the 
colonial homes, and much useful information is given of 
the pioneers who helped to make our country what it is 
to-day. 

David Morris is a fine fellow, and about him is woven a fine u Injun ” 
story that is sure to delight the boys. — Universalist Leader , Boston . 

Mr. Stratemeyer is an entertaining story-teller, and his books are clean. 
— Herald t Rochester , iVo Y. 



COLONIAL SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


THIRD VOLUME 

AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL 

Or a Soldier Boy's Final Victory 

Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.25 

T HIS volume relates the adventures of Dave Morris and his cousin 
Henry during the two last campaigns against the French for the 
possession of Canada and the territory below the great lakes. The scal- 
ing of the heights of Quebec under General Wolfe, and the memorable 
battle on the Plains of Abraham, are given in detail. There are many 
stirring scenes of battle, but the tale is not all of war. Pictures of the 
rough-and-ready camp life of that day are given, and there are also 
adventures while fishing and hunting, and with the Indians. 

Since the passing of Henty and Alger, Mr. Stratemeyer controls the 
field in this particular branch of literature. The chief charm of his stories 
lies in the fact that an enormous quantity of valuable information, col- 
lected from the most reliable sources, is deftly woven into the narrative 
without taking away from the interest. — Philadelphia Inquirer . 

FOURTH VOLUME 

ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC 

Or Pioneer Boys of the Ohio 

12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T HIS volume tells of times in our country immediately after the war 
with France for the possession of Canada. The tale is complete in 
itself, but in it are introduced a number of characters which have already 
figured in this series, including that brave young soldier, Dave Morris, 
his sturdy cousin, Henry, and their common friend, Sam Barringford. 
Pontiac, the great chief of the Ottawas, is also a leading figure and much 
is told of his work in organizing his great conspiracy against the whites. 
A fight with the Indians and the French in a snowstorm is especially 
realistic, and the entire book carries with it the atmosphere of colonial 
times. 

Boys are attracted to stories by Edward Stratemeyer, and they will 
enjoy “On the Trail of Pontiac .” — Plain Dealer , Cleveland , 0. 


American Boys’ Biographical Series 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME ONE 

AMERICAN BOYS' 

LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY 

300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute and from Photo® 
graphs $1.25 

H ERE is told the whole story of McKinley’s boyhood days, his life 
at school and at college, his jyork as a school teacher, his glorious 
career in the army, his struggles to obtain a footing as a lawyer, 
his efforts as a Congressman and a Governor, and lastly his prosperous 
career as our President, all told in a style particularly adapted to beys and 
young men. The book is full of interesting anecdotes, all taken from 
life., showing fully the sincere, honest, painstaking efforts of a life cut all 
too short. The volume will prove an inspiration to all boys and young 
men, and should be in every library. 

For nearly a year Mr. Stratemeyer has been gathering material and 
giving careful study to the life of the young William, his childhood, his 
boyhood, and all his inspiring and romantic history. The story was near- 
ing its end when the awful finale came and tragedy ended the drama of 
President McKinley’s life. — New York Journal . 

VOLUME TWO 

AMERICAN BOYS' LIFE OF 

THEODORE ROOSEVELT 

300 pages 12mo Illustrated from Photographs $1.25 

T HIS excellent work for young 
people covers the whole life of 
our strenuous executive, as school- 
boy, college student, traveler, author, 
hunter and ranchman, as assembly- 
man, as civil service commissioner, 
as Assistant Secretary of the Navy, 
as a daring rough rider, as Governor 
of New York, and lastly as President. 
Full of stories taken from real life 
and told in a manner to interest both 
young and old. 

We unreservedly recommend Mr. Strate- 
meyer’s books for boys. They are wholesome, accurate as to historical 
details, and always interesting . — Boston Times . 



SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEflEYER 


VOLUME ONE 

ON TO PEKIN 

Or Old Glory in China, 

Cloth 330 pages Illustrated by A. Burnham Shute $1.25 

T HE hero, Gilbert Pennington, has become a lieutenant in the regular 
army, and goes from the Philippines with the Ninth Regiment to 
take part in the rescue of the beleaguered British Embassy at Pekin by 
the international forces. Mr. Stratemeyer has risen to the occasion by 
giving, in addition to one of his very best stories, a store of information 
concerning China and the Chinese, conveyed in a natural and entertaining 
manner. This book is directly in line with the “Old Glory Series,” and 
nearly all the well-known characters are here. The demand for this 
volume is enormous. 


BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON 

Or Two Boys' Adventures in South Africa 

BY EDWARD STRATEMEYER 
Illustrated by A. Burnham Shute 354 pages Price $1.25 

R ELATES the experiences of two boys, cousins to each other, one 
American and the other English, whose fathers are engaged in the 
Transvaal, one in farming and the other in mining operations. While the 
two boys are off on a hunting trip after big game the war between the 
Boers and Britons suddenly breaks out, and while endeavoring to rejoin 
their parents the boys find themselves placed between hostile armies, and 
their thrilling experiences are brought out in Mr. Stratemeyer’s best style. 

Exhibits the same qualities which have given popularity to his former 
writings. — The Times , Pittsburg , Pa. 

A stirring story of the South African War. — The Journal , India - 
napolis , Ind. 

The kind of story to please boys and give them a fair idea of a great 
historical event. — St. Louts Post-Despatch. 


GOOD BOOKS FOR BOYS 

By EDWARD STRATEHEYER 

LARRY THE WANDERER 

Or The Rise of a Nobody 

Cloth Illustrated Price $1.00 

T HIS is a plain tale of everyday life, written especially for boys and 
girls who do not care particularly for stories with a historical or 
geographical background. Larry is a youth who has been knocked 
around from pillar to post for a number of years. He knows nothing 
about himself, where he came from, or where he belongs. He is a bit 
rough in his ways, but beneath this rude exterior is a heart of gold. The 
unravelling of the curious mystery which surrounds the lad’s identity 
makes good reading. 

JOE, THE SURVEYOR 

Or The Value of a Lost Claim 

Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.00 

T HIS story relates the trials and triumphs of a sturdy country youth, 
who is compelled, by the force of circumstances, to go forth into 
the world and earn, not alone his own living, but also support for his twin 
sister and his invalid father. The book is filled with healthful adventure, 
and teaches the moral that honesty is the best policy. Girls will enjoy 
this volume no less than will the boys. 

7 WO YOUNG LUMBERMEN 

Or From Maine to Oregon for Fortune 

320 pages Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 

A SPLENDID story, covering the whole of the great lumber industry 
of our country, the scene shifting from Maine to Michigan and the 
Great Lakes, and then to the Columbia and the Great Northwest. The 
heroes are two sturdy youths who have been brought up among the 
lumbermen of their native State, and who strike out in an honest 
endeavor to better their condition. A contract with a railroad company 
for lumber forms an important part of the story, and how all hands 
worked to fulfil this contract will interest older heads quite as much as 
young people. An ideal volume for every wide-awake American who 
wishes to know what our great lumber industry is to-day. 

Boys are acquiring the Stratemeyer habit. — Post , Chicago. 

Mr. Stratemeyer’s books are not only entertaining but instructive,-* 
Daily Press , Portland \ Me. 


the boys' delight — the ** Old Glory Series.”— The Christian Advocate , N.2 . 

THE OLD GLORY SERIES 

BY EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


FIRST VOLUME 

UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA 

Or The War Fortunes of a Castaway 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T HIS book, published in September, 1898, at once sprang to the front 
as the greatest success among books for boys since the famous Army 
and Navy series by “Oliver Optic,” and its popularity has steadily in- 
creased as the succeeding volumes of the series have appeared. 

Edward Stratemeyer weaves the incidents of the naval conflict at Manila into a 
narrative of experiences and adventure which is wholesome in spirit and full of 
excitement, and which the boys will like. — Congregationalist. 

SECOND VOLUME 

A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA 

Or Fighting for the Single Star 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T HE career of Larry Russell, as recorded in “Under Dewey at 
Manila,” was the hit of the season among juveniles. The fortunes 
of Larry are equalled in interest by the adventures of Ben, his older 
brother, and his friend, Gilbert Pennington, and the many exciting scenes 
through which they passed during their service in the army. Ben enlisted 
in a New York volunteer regiment, while Gilbert joined Colonel Roosevelt’s 
famous Rough Riders. Their life in camp, the capture of El Caney, the 
charge at San Juan hill, are all vividly described. 

Mr. Stratemeyer’s boys are clean, manly fellows, and deserve the popularity 
Which doubtless awaits them.-— Christian Register. 

THIRD VOLUME 

FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS 

Or Under Schley on the 44 Brooklyn 9 * 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

I N this book Walter Russell, brother to Larry and Ben, the respective 
heroes of the two preceding volumes of the series, finds his way to 
Boston, secures employment, enlists in the navy, and is assigned to the 
“ Brooklyn.” Then follow intensely interesting chapters, telling of Com- 
modore Schley, the routine life of the “Jackies,” and blockade and dis- 
covery of Cervera’s fleet, followed by the memorable conflict of July 3. 

«* Fighting in Cuban Waters ” is in the same hearty, manly spirit that has made 
the other volumes of the Old Glory Series so much liked. — Journal of Education , 


OLD GLORY SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


FOURTH VOLUME 

UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES 

Or A Young Officer in the Tropics 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T HE “ Young Officer in the Tropics ” is none other than our old friend 
Ben Russell, who upon reenlisting for service in the Philippines is 
given the same position, that of second lieutenant, to which he had been 
promoted for gallantry while “ A Young Volunteer in Cuba.” 

Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when it comes to writing about Ameri* 
can heroes, their brilliant doings on land and sea. — Times % Boston. 

FIFTH VOLUME 

THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE 

Or Under Lawton through Luzon 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

B EN and Larry figure in the “ Campaign of the Jungle,” which has a 
truthful and graphic historical setting in two expeditions of the noble 
General Lawton, whose portrait adorns the cover, the first being that di- 
rected against Santa Cruz on the Laguna de Bay, and the second from 
Manila to San Isidro, through one hundred and fifty miles of jungle. The 
same sterling qualities that have made these brothers so well liked carry 
them through perilous scenes with true American fortitude. 

A good war story. — San Francisco Bulletin . 

SIXTH VOLUME 

UNDER MACARTHUR IN LUZON 

Or Last Battles in the Philippines 

12mo Cloth llustrated by A. B. Shute Medallion cover 
320 pages $1.25 

W E have here a thoroughly up-to-date, clean, and entertaining boys' 
story, complete in itself, but forming the sixth and last volume of 
the u Old Glory ” Series. The boys in all parts of the country have been 
anxiously waiting to learn the final fortunes of the three Russell brothers, 
Larry, Walter, and Ben, with scarcely less interest in Gilbert Pennington, 
hero of “On to Pekin,” and not forgetting other old friends on land and 
sea. All are here, doing their duty in the same straightforward way as 
ever; and the final battles in the Philippines are followed with that accu- 
racy of statement which Mr. Stratemeyer always employs, thereby giving 
general value to his books without in the least impairing the interest of the 
story. 

Maintains the high standard in attractive narration which was set by the first 
volume. The six books make a complete and valuable collection. — New fork 
World . 


Tilt Stratemeyer Popular Series 


io volumes Illustrated and handsomely bound in gold and colors 
Attractive new cover designs Price $.75 per volume 

S INCE the passing of “ Oliver Op- 
tic ” and G. A. Henty, Edward 
Stratemeyer is the most widely read 
of all living writers for the young, and 
each year extends the vast and enthusi- 
astic throng. In obedience to the 
popular demand we have established 
this Popular Series comprising ten 
representative books by this great 
writer. The stories are bright and 
breezy, moral in tone, and while full 
of adventure, are not sensational. 
These books, at a popular price, will 
be a rare treat for the boys and girls. 

h THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE 
Or Luke Foster s Strange Voyage 

“ r T'HE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE ” relates the adventures 
X of a youth who ran away from his guardian’s house because he 
could no longer stand the cruel treatment received. He had never before 
been to sea, and when he is unexpectedly carried off on the “ Spitfire ** 
he encounters many adventures of which he had never before dreamed. 

“ The Last Cruise of the Spitfire ” is of deep interest to the bounding heart of an 
enthusiastic boy, — Kansas City Times, 

2 * REUBEN STONE'S DISCOVERY 

Or The Young Miller of Torrent Bend 

“ T) EUBEN STONE’S DISCOVERY ” tells, in a matter-of-fact way, 
j\ the exploits of a young miller who is left in charge of his father’s 
property while the parent goes West to seek a more promising field for 
business. A story which girls as well as boys will enjoy reading. 

“ Reuben Stone** Discovery ia especially good. — New York jfftmid. 



The Stratemeyer Popular Series 


3 . TRUE TO HIMSELF 

Or Roger Strong’s Straggle for Place 

I N this story we are introduced to Roger Strong, a typical American 
country lad and his sister Kate, who, by an unhappy combination of 
events are thrown upon their own resources and compelled to make their 
own way in the world. Roger tells his own story in a modest, manly way 
that will charm both boys and girls, and that their parents will equally 
admire. 

" True to Himself” is an exceptionally good book of its class.— Milwaukee Sen- 
tinel, 

4 . RICHARD DARE'S VENTURE 

Or Striking Out for Himself 

** T3 ICHARD DARE’S VENTURE ” relates the experiences of a 
Jtv country youth who comes to New York to seek his fortune. He 
finds life in the metropolis no bed of roses, and it is only by the hardest 
work that he gains a footing at all. He enters the stationery business, and 
the plot against the boy is one that youthful readers will doubtless follow 
with keen interest. 

5 . OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH 

Or T he Mystery of a Mine 

I N this story we have the adventures of a manly American youth, who 
goes West to locate a mine in which his invalid father owns a large 
interest. He is accompanied by his school chum, who has run away from 
home, and the trip is made by way of the Isthmus of Panama. Arriving 
at San Francisco, the boys, accompanied by an elderly friend and a guide, 
set out for the interior on horseback. The story gives many interesting 
sketches of mining life in the remote portions of California. 

A breezy boy’s book is *' Oliver Bright’s Search.” The author has a. direct, 
graphic style, and every healthy-minded youth will enjoy the volume. — IV. Y. 
Commercial Advertiser, 

6 . TO ALASKA FOR GOLD 

Or The Fortune Hunters of the Yukon 

T HIS tale tells of the adventures of two Maine boys who grow tired of 
trying to make a living in the lumber district of that State. An uncle, 
who is an experienced miner, offers to take them on a trip to the famous 
Klondike gold region, and the boys start out, first for the West, where 
they join their relative and several other fortune hunters, and then for the 
heart of Alaska. The gold regions are gained at last, and a summer and 
winter are spent there, hunting for the precious yellow nuggets and fight* 
ing off starvation and other perils. 


The Stratemeyer Popular Series 


7. THE YOUNG AUCTIONEER 

Or The Polishing of a. Rolling Stone 

A BOY’S book, but one anybody might read with interest. The hero, 
out of work and left alone in the world, strikes up an acquaintance- 
ship with another young fellow, who is experienced as an auctioneer. The 
two form a partnership, purchase a horse and wagon, stock the turnout 
with goods, and take to the road. The numerous adventures of the part* 
ners are told in a graphic way. 

8. BOUND TO BE AN ELECTRICIAN 

Or Franklin Bell's Success 

F RANKLIN BELL starts out under many difficulties. He is poor 
and has no friends to assist him in advancing himself. But a showing 
of what pluck can do at a most perilous moment gains for him the open- 
ing he seeks, and from that time on his advancement is steady. From the 
East he is sent to Chicago by his employer, where he clears up a business 
complication involving a large sum of money. 

9. SHORTHAND TOM, THE REPORTER 

Or The Exploits of a Bright Boy 

T )M SWIFT was a shorthand writer. Losing his position in the 
office of a rascally lawyer, he fell in with a newspaper editor and 
became a reporter on one of the leading New York dailies. His duties 
took him to several strange places and brought him in contact with dan- 
gerous men who were trying to do Tom and his sister Susie out of some 
property which had been left to them. Poor Susie was kidnapped, and it 
was Tom who set out on a long and perilous search for her. 

tO. FIGHTING FOR HIS OWN 

Or The Fortunes of a Young Artist 

L ESTER FLEMING’S one ambition was to become an artist, but 
being nothing but a poor country lad, he seemed at first far from 
realizing that ambition. But Lester was a wide-awake fellow, and when 
his foster-father was drowned, the boy took the care of the household 
on his shoulders, and worked his way along in spite of many obstacles. 

Mr. Stratemeyer has the knack of writing- stories that appeal to boys, and that 
have yet an advantage from an educational standpoint. — Living Church, 

Mr. Stratemeyer’s stories, after the manner of “ Oliver Optic,” combine fiction 
and fact in a way to instruct and please boys. They are always well told. — 
Western Christian Advocate „ 


f 














* 




c? ^ o 

. 1 ' * * O <<$► o 0 " 0 <* 

° /T * 

*b 0 




c ' /» 







+ <a> 

" ’ • <y 

4 > v c\ 

• * % ^ 

* v*V 

° 0 >-* 

♦ o *T/ ioc* \|v * x V 

' <^» • ^”^4 ^ ^ 

<0 O -O . . - A ^K 

> 6 ^ t • 1 J* ♦ % V^ c ° * ° * *<£ 

v ± * O j • 4-c^Xv .. <* *P 

r 






o % 

*•-•• A 0 

V’ « y *®^ ■* A 

V^ v ® 

b S ^ V W/W^* A V ^ - ^HMH^ - ,S^, 

1 ' * * O ,$> -i 

. ° ,y /-«^' * 

’oV* » 


■l °6 




*sr 





library of congress 






